Mention that LessTif and Motif cause File Selection dialog to pop up
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
75d80cc6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-01-16
2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1 7
0cb146bf 8
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
0cb146bf 43
1fa28578
GM
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
75d80cc6
DL
46** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
47behaviour of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. [This change was made
48in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
49
cf523f0e
GM
50** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
51let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
52
a23e6d3c 53** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
fc46ca23
GM
54current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
55beginning and end of the buffer.
56
8416e94a
DL
57** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
58symbol, not double-quoted.
59
2a64f8c2 60** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
61version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
62rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
63lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 64
22adbe54
DL
65+++
66** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
67system for keyboard input.
68
eb1b0c74
GM
69+++
70** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
71to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
72
7495f7ca
EZ
73+++
74** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
75as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
76with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
77example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
78middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
79
1636ca09 80+++
a01cfb77
GM
81** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
82changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
83buffer by default.
84
c607d53d 85** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 86trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
87this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
88
4104194e
GM
89** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
90be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
91
c6f01e00
MB
92** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
93To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
94`auto-compression-mode' command.
95
4c724b32
DL
96** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
97`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
98
b856f39c 99+++
068127d6
GM
100** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
101operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
102
fd06c7da
MB
103** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
104(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
105remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
106may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
107
8ac08dea 108+++
62c273d7
DL
109** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
110is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
111
112+++
113** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
114mode `iswitchb-mode'.
115
8ac08dea 116+++
f393cf90
DL
117** Gnus changes.
118
119The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
120four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
121internationalization and mail-fetching.
122
123*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
124many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
125
126If you used procmail like in
127
128(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
129(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
130(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
131(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
132
327652be 133this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
134
135(setq mail-sources
136 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
137 :suffix ".in")))
138
139More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
140Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
141
142*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
143Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
144Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
145longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
146
657706fa
DL
147The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
148use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
149installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 150
60dd7e0e 151*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
152parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
153are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
154now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
155
156*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
157called to position point.
158
159*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
160summary buffers and NOV files.
161
162*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
163of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
164
165*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
166subtly different manner.
167
168*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
169and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
170ever-changing layouts.
171
172*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
173
72190b84 174*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
175
176** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1778859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
178more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
179empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
180window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
181on.
182
ba9eeda1
GM
183** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
184set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
185file that is already visited under a different name.
186
42ac0ae5
GM
187** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
188nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
189
190** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
191recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
192signaled.
193
ba9eeda1 194** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
195support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
196use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
197buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
198M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
199new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
200
b941a14b 201+++
ba9eeda1 202** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 203and displays information about that.
b941a14b 204
ba9eeda1 205** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
206file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
207
5e56e175
GM
208** Polish, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
209have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `de-refcard.tex' and
210`fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
d7b38c05 211
657706fa
DL
212** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
213
d7b38c05 214** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5e56e175
GM
215`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
216`fr-drdref.tex'.
d7b38c05 217
25ad1371
GM
218** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
219expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
220
221This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
222determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
223mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
224interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
225regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
226associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
227
b856f39c 228+++
f0298744
DL
229** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
230displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
231menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
232menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
233
9a8d84ca
DL
234** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
235a version-dependent component.
236
89d57763 237** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
5f368d29
GM
238let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
239
240On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
241according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
242key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
243option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
244delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
245
246If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
247a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
248Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
249`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
250the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
251have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
252
253Programmatically, you can call function
254delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
255key.
d76c03ea 256
3b4fa1b2
DL
257** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
258using that menu.
259
40e857ea 260** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 261suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 262
beb2eb00 263+++
c08398de
DL
264** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
265buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
266contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
267by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
268insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
269the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
270Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
271
db7a3ede 272+++
3d6cd763
GM
273** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
274coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
275escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
276such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
277recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 278always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 279read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
280(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
281RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 282
0b8a3a6d
DL
283** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
284environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
285
424d8b44 286+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
287** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
288point in a pop-up window.
289
6d35b49f 290+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
291** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
292displays all characters in that character set.
293
294** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
295coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
296
a4067978 297+++
5cb6a58e 298** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 299on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
300defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
301commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 302
424d8b44 303+++
a1b8d58b
GM
304** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
305
6e417ca5
DL
306** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
307been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
308
424d8b44 309+++
5898e075
DL
310** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
311`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
312indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
313indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
314
424d8b44 315+++
abfcc168
GM
316** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
317sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 318(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
319You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
320
424d8b44 321+++
cc181e95
GM
322** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
323on the display using several methods
324
424d8b44 325+++
cc181e95
GM
326- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
327a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
328be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
329
424d8b44 330+++
cc181e95 331- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 332equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 333
da4496b6 334- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
335
336- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
337the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
338
424d8b44 339+++
3b4fa1b2 340** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 341an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 342command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 343does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 344
424d8b44 345+++
176256a1 346** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
347`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
348typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 349
dd0add8e
DL
350** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
351characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
352
bf3ba9ac 353+++
699238d9
GM
354** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
355compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
356this behavior.
357
358The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
359compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
360Emacs dump core.
361
424d8b44 362+++
699238d9 363** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 364
7233c5bd
GM
365*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
366whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
367is useful for debugging X problems.
368
369Example:
370
699238d9 371 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 372
100b3cbb
GM
373*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
374visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
375the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
376and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
377visual class names are
378
379 TrueColor
380 PseudoColor
381 DirectColor
382 StaticColor
383 GrayScale
384 StaticGray
385
386Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
387`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
388meaning.
389
390The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
391supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
392`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
393visual.
394
395Example:
396
699238d9 397 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
398
399*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
400specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
401default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
402resource values are `true' or `on'.
403
404Example:
405
699238d9 406 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 407
0d0c76b8
EZ
408** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
409more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
410now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
411
e921a911 412+++
42088c12 413** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 414display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
415shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
416be customized.
c60ea02e 417
424d8b44 418+++
31047e0d
DL
419** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
420
424d8b44 421+++
b02786f9
GM
422** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
423all frames except the selected one.
424
3261c1d8
DL
425** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
426to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
427
ffe36136 428** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
429the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
430MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
431displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
432
0292b49f 433+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
434** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
435MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 436
559cee90
DL
437** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
438read mail from the menu etc.
439
480b5773 440+++
271b4185
GM
441** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
442a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
443
0daee095
GM
444** Changes in Texinfo mode.
445
a5e350c9 446*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
447macros
448
449 Key binding Macro
450 -------------------------
451 C-c C-c C-s @strong
452 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 453 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 454 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 455 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
456 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
457 M-RET @item
458
459*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 460
559cee90
DL
461** Changes in Outline mode.
462
463There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
464`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
465the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
466
327652be 467** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 468
c0a8c108
EZ
469+++
470*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
471with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
472are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
473Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
474buffers to kill, as before.
475
476Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 477i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
478this way.
479
956777b3
GM
480** Changes to Show Paren mode.
481
482*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
483The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
484use. Default is 1000.
485
f6989277 486+++
404fa7d6
DL
487** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
488groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
489
424d8b44
DL
490+++
491** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
492M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
493M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
494buffers.
8964fec7 495
424d8b44 496+++
39783d73
WP
497** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
498under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
499.emacs file.
500
501The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
502determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
503
d35fce81
GM
504** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
505abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
506`directory-abbrev-alist'.
507
a933dad1
DL
508** Faces and frame parameters.
509
510There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
511Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
512`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
513`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
514sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
515for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
516parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
517
518Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
519`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 520`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
521`default' face and vice versa.
522
d80061fa 523+++
f77a4a8a
GM
524** New face `menu'.
525
526The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
527Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
528attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
529
424d8b44 530+++
a933dad1
DL
531** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
532
533The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
534colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
535correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
536the screen gamma of a frame's display.
537
538PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
539in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
540color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
541
542The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
543`ScreenGamma'.
544
545** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
546
547The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
548Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
549oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
550of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
551the text.
552
553** Emacs has a new face implementation.
554
555The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
556font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
557height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
558These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
559specify a font.
560
561Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
562These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
563under Lisp changes, below.
564
7f90b826 565** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
a933dad1 566
424d8b44
DL
567+++
568** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
569of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
570otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
571
572** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
573truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
574foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
575customizing face `fringe'.
576
8d0f00fd
MB
577** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
578You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
ccd87890
EZ
579In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
580appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
581occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
582the window to be partially obscured.)
8d0f00fd
MB
583
584The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
585versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
586and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
587
588** LessTif support.
589
6613cfc4
GM
590Emacs now runs with the Lesstif toolkit (see
591<http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92 or later.
592Please use Lesstif's Motif 1.2 emulation; it's Motif 2.0 and 2.1
593emulation are known not to work with Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
594
595** Toolkit scroll bars.
596
597Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
598LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
599configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
600bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
601bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
602Emacs.
603
604When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
605Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
606Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
607Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
608define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
609`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
610
611Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
612a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
613directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
614different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
615system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
616add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
617
618The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
619`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
620This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
621image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
622Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
623
624** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
625
626When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
627widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
628Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
629
424d8b44 630+++
a933dad1
DL
631** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
632
633When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
634whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
635defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
636highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
637displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
638whitespace.
639
6e612d4d 640+++
a933dad1
DL
641** Busy-cursor.
642
643Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
644display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
645
424d8b44 646+++
a933dad1
DL
647** Blinking cursor
648
649M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
650terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
651and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
652the group `cursor'.
653
8ac08dea 654+++
a933dad1
DL
655** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
656
657This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
658generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
659See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
660details.
661
662Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
663have to do anything to activate it.
664
665** Tabs and variable-width text.
666
667Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
668defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
669independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
670Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
671
672** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
673
424d8b44 674+++
a933dad1
DL
675*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
676
677 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
678
79dd1637
RS
679The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
680LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 681
79dd1637
RS
682*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
683LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 684
34d90e29 685+++
a933dad1
DL
686** Hscrolling in C code.
687
cc181e95
GM
688Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
689`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
690customized.
a933dad1 691
03ff8aab
GM
692If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
693scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
694for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
695the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
696to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
697
8ac08dea 698+++
a933dad1
DL
699** Tool bar support.
700
701Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
702of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
703changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
704displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
705if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
706icons will be used.
707
708To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
709for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
710also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 711
424d8b44 712+++
a933dad1
DL
713** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
714
715Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
716mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
717line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
718about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
719in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
720
721Currently, the following actions have been defined:
722
723- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
724buffers.
725
726- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
727M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
728
729- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
730
424d8b44
DL
731- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
732`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1 733
3b6936cc 734- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
a933dad1
DL
735
736** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
737
738When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 739from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
740non-nil.
741
742** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
743
744Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
745Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
746the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
747italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
748Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
749attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
750on terminals.
a933dad1 751
54a9404d
EZ
752The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
753supported on character terminals.
754
a933dad1
DL
755** Sound support
756
2f516940 757Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 758driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 759supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 760
424d8b44 761+++
a933dad1
DL
762** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
763the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
764forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
765value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
766users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
767even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
768
769The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
770
0e18b431 771+++
a933dad1
DL
772** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
773
774As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
775drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
776`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
777
fdd8bb68 778+++
a933dad1
DL
779** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
780bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
781
782This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
783`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
784variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
785
c5d00c64 786+++
a933dad1
DL
787** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
788
789When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 790value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 791number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 792fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
793
794When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
795value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
796number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 797fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
798
799** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
800notably at the end of lines.
801
802All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
803spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
804
424d8b44 805+++
eee54b0e
DL
806There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
807
a933dad1
DL
808** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
809query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
810after each match to get the replacement text.
811
00782214 812+++
d5483ab1
GM
813** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
814you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 815
424d8b44 816** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
817you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
818lisp-complete-symbol.
819
7af69644 820+++
a933dad1
DL
821** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
822
163ea954 823If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
824longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
825is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
826minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
827
828- User option: max-mini-window-height
829
830Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
831fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 832specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
833
834Default is 0.25.
835
a299a6f0
GM
836- User option: resize-mini-windows
837
838How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 839resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
840grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
841again.
842
843Default is `grow-only'.
844
2f72fd2f
GM
845** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
846
0d43b60d
GM
847** Changes to hideshow.el
848
849Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
850selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
851conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
852
853*** Generalized block selection and traversal
854
855A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
856(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
857which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
858`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
859point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
860(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
861
862If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
863i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
864backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
865the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
866
867*** Isearch support for updating mode line
868
869During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
870blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
871line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
872portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
873is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
874
875To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
876something like this in your .emacs.
877
878 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
879 (lambda ()
880 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
881
327652be
TTN
882*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
883
884Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
885header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
886`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
887moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
888block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
889behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
890useful.
891
892You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
893function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
894of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
895code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
896appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
897
898(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
899 (hs-hide-level 1)
900 (forward-sexp 1))
901(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
902
903The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
904emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
905only for code blocks.
906
907*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
908
909Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
910parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
911display for implementation.
912
913*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
914
915The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
916LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
917which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
918new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
919
920 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
921 hs-show-block C-c C-s
922 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
923 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
924 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
925 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
926 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
927
928These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
929
559cee90
DL
930** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
931
424d8b44 932+++
1b24b888
GM
933*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
934an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
935log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
936
424d8b44 937+++
1b24b888
GM
938**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
939current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
940
941+++
1b24b888
GM
942*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
943in a log file.
eb2aac9d 944
502004be 945+++
1b24b888
GM
946*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
947entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 948
502004be 949+++
1b24b888 950*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
951version number is performed based on regular expressions from
952`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
953Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 954
2c63c979 955*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 956
79c78e77
GM
957** Changes to cmuscheme
958
959*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
960`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
961
3476b54a
GM
962** Changes in Font Lock
963
964*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 965font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 966
2be6ecc6
GM
967*** Multiline patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
968set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
2c63c979 969
a5e350c9
SM
970*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
971the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 972
601e0081
SM
973*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
974Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
975
b3b98592
GM
976** Comint (subshell) changes
977
988cded7
MB
978These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
979include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
980
981*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
982to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
983parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
984user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
985this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
986respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
987feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
988`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
989
990*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
991and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
992
988cded7 993*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
994buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
995buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
996
997The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
998M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
999the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
1000
988cded7
MB
1001*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
1002and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
1003see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 1004
988cded7 1005*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
1006saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
1007argument, it appends to the file.
1008
988cded7 1009*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
1010(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
1011compatibility.
1012
0e40b809
EL
1013*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
1014ring (history).
d648cc45 1015
fe5d5d8c 1016*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
1017identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1018strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1019
e26cec67
GM
1020** Changes to Rmail mode
1021
b97cd2cc 1022*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
1023set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
1024receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1025recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1026`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1027as correspondent.
1028
1029Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1030mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1031regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1032
3b55acc9
GM
1033*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1034to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1035Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1036with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1037for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1038
6a1950ec
GM
1039*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1040like `j'.
1041
5bb6f079
RS
1042*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1043specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1044digest message.
e26cec67 1045
993d8b7d
DL
1046*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1047in which folder to put messages automatically.
1048
4ddb57b2
EZ
1049*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1050with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1051due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1052
400a1ed0
GM
1053** Changes to TeX mode
1054
a5e350c9 1055*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1056`latex-mode'.
1057
a5e350c9
SM
1058*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1059
1060*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1061
1062*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1063
a933dad1
DL
1064** Changes to RefTeX mode
1065
1066*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1067 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1068 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1069 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1070 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1071 can be edited from that buffer.
1072
1073*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1074 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1075 `A' to use all marked entries).
1076
1077*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1078 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1079
1080*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1081 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1082 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1083 been cited.
1084
38de9631
GM
1085** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1086The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1087semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1088in column 1 are always made leaves.
1089
a933dad1
DL
1090** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1091has the following new features:
1092
1093*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1094may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1095to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1096time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1097
1098*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1099feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1100file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1101compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1102pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1103defaults to 1.
1104
5d94f558 1105** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1106file names.
1107
424d8b44 1108+++
a933dad1
DL
1109** Tooltips.
1110
1111Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1112mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1113turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1114
1115Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1116variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1117the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1118tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1119
424d8b44 1120+++
a933dad1
DL
1121** Customize changes
1122
1123*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1124`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1125cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1126
1127*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1128Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1129default).
1130
0ae51efb
GM
1131*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1132between custom options. Example:
1133
1134 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1135 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1136 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1137 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1138 :group 'mule
1139 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1140 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1141
1142This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1143current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1144first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1145
a933dad1
DL
1146** New features in evaluation commands
1147
5e03eb84 1148*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1149modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1150print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1151customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1152eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1153
5e03eb84
GM
1154*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1155code when called with a prefix argument.
1156
ead53494
GM
1157** Ispell changes
1158
37d8a691 1159+++
bbe15990
EZ
1160*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1161transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1162spell-checks the current buffer.
1163
37d8a691 1164+++
385ff9e3
GM
1165*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1166added.
1167
1168*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1169correction is made and re-checked.
1170
74ec6045 1171*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1172
1173*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1174cases.
1175
1176*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1177on syntax errors.
1178
1179*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1180end of the buffer.
1181
a933dad1
DL
1182** Dired changes
1183
1184*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1185command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1186is, delete only empty directories.
1187
1188*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1189command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1190copy directories recursively.
1191
f6737cde
GM
1192*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1193in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1194the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1195
2f72fd2f
GM
1196*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1197replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1198directory.
1199
7381ae05
MB
1200*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1201a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1202This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1203will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1204accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1205
e024b101
GM
1206*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1207from ls switches.
1208
60b392a7
MB
1209*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1210of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1211which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1212source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1213
a933dad1
DL
1214** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1215use the -f option when sending mail.
1216
b1c609b1
GM
1217** CC mode changes.
1218
1219Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1220current user setups (although it's believed that these
1221incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1222However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1223back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1224compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1225release.
1226
7972fcfc
GM
1227*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1228This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1229of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1230non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1231want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1232have to bother.
1233
1234Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1235situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1236and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1237If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1238the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1239by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1240
b1c609b1
GM
1241*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1242When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1243variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1244take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1245is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1246settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1247possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1248Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1249
1250By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1251special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1252the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1253of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1254above.
1255
1256Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1257when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1258function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1259call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1260then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1261values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1262only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1263function documentation for more info.
1264
1265The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1266especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1267with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1268intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1269such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1270is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1271configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1272global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1273
1274(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1275
1276**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1277This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1278
1279This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1280variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1281completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1282the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1283empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1284style system.
1285
1286**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1287In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1288c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1289as far as possible.
1290
1291*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1292CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1293surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1294chapter about this in the manual.
1295
1296**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1297The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1298recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1299primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1300adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1301
1302**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1303This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1304c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1305
1306**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1307This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1308
1309It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1310Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1311A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1312inside CC Mode.
1313
1314Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1315causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1316the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1317available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1318cc-mode/).
1319
1320**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1321The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1322specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1323literals.
1324
1325**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1326It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1327prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1328you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1329this function.
1330
1331*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1332It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1333to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1334struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1335Thanks to Eric Eide.
1336
1337*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1338It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1339opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1340
1341**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1342
1343*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1344See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1345better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1346and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1347
1348*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1349previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1350the column specified by comment-column.
1351
1352*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1353In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1354is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1355prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1356contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1357don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1358
1359*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1360instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1361arguments.
1362
1363*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1364
1365*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1366c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1367c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1368variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1369Provan).
1370
1371*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1372
c407c570
GM
1373** Makefile mode changes
1374
1375*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1376
5d94f558 1377*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1378Fontlock mode is active.
1379
87be76f6
GM
1380** Isearch changes
1381
3353ef5a
GM
1382*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1383so that searches can be resumed.
1384
1385*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1386respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1387that started the search.
1388
87be76f6 1389*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1390selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1391
c8a8458a 1392+++
87be76f6
GM
1393*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1394
d35fce81 1395Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1396`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1397search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1398before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1399highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1400`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1401
1402The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1403will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1404Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1405using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1406usual snappy response.
1407
1408If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1409matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1410set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1411isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1412
21bc6203 1413+++
35384f06
GM
1414** Changes in sort.el
1415
1416The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1417as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1418new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1419numeric base.
87be76f6 1420
d7b511c4
GM
1421** Changes to Ange-ftp
1422
424d8b44 1423+++
d7b511c4 1424*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1425names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1426sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1427
d7b511c4
GM
1428*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1429ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1430
9d453139
SS
1431*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1432output ^M at the end of lines.
1433
4b9347b3
GM
1434** Shell script mode changes.
1435
1436Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1437derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1438sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1439
79214ddf
FP
1440** Etags changes.
1441
1442*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1443
aca0be23 1444*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1445possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1446{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1447This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1448a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1449
79214ddf
FP
1450*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1451declarations when given the --declarations option.
1452
1453*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1454"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1455
1456*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1457types.
1458
de370c4c 1459*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1460
1461*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1462
1463*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1464are now tagged.
1465
89d57763
FP
1466*** In makefiles, tags the targets.
1467
79214ddf
FP
1468*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1469variables are tagged.
1470
1471*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1472
8dc78b52
FP
1473*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1474for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1475
c8d94f86 1476+++
f6737cde
GM
1477** Changes in etags.el
1478
3f6e4b8b
GM
1479*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1480tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1481is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1482
f6737cde
GM
1483*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1484the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1485
1486If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1487FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1488TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1489obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1490
1491TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1492
1493FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1494List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1495
1496A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1497
1498 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1499 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1500 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1501
1502*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1503of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1504
1505*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1506names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1507
0c68ce6f
GM
1508*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1509If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1510/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1511"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1512point will go to the beginning of the file.
1513
424d8b44 1514+++
fbc164de
PE
1515** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1516and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1517LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1518
c3eb1f10 1519+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1520** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1521Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
15228859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1523GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
15248859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1525releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1526(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1527
732b9cdd
GM
1528+++
1529** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
89d57763 1530These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
732b9cdd
GM
1531of the tutorial.
1532
424d8b44 1533+++
163ea954 1534** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1535remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1536appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1537
1538** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1539
424d8b44 1540+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1541** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1542
6ab8d72d 1543+++
f6499c03 1544** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1545containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1546expression from that list, are not checked.
1547
5d94f558
SS
1548** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1549When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1550and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1551the buffer, just like for the local files.
1552
dc28878c
GM
1553** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1554
df8a9f78 1555+++
95931eb1
GM
1556** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1557displays local abbrevs, only.
1558
54baed30
GM
1559** VC Changes
1560
1561VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1562easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1563Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1564to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1565changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1566`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1567version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1568each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1569file is registered in that backend.
1570
1571When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1572backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1573directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1574master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1575the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1576As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1577
1578The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1579still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1580RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1581vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1582where it doesn't make sense.)
1583
1584The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1585obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1586`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1587
1588*** General Changes
1589
1590The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1591checks are always done now.
1592
327652be 1593VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1594operations.
1595
c286608e
SM
1596`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1597`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1598`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1599
22933be8
AS
1600The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1601first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1602current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1603the working file (``merge news'').
1604
1605The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1606(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1607downwards.
1608
1609*** Multiple Backends
1610
1611VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1612useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1613repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1614commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1615local RCS archives.
1616
1617To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1618should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1619backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1620`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1621
1622If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1623it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1624Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1625by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1626backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1627VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1628happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1629from the more remote backend.
1630
1631If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1632another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1633any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1634pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1635
1636After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1637changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1638local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1639buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1640
54baed30
GM
1641*** Changes for CVS
1642
1643There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1644default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1645remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1646by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1647regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1648that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1649queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1650
22933be8
AS
1651If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1652repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1653revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1654any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1655backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1656number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1657(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1658of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1659the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1660automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1661since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1662name.)
22933be8 1663
54baed30
GM
1664If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1665repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1666If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1667commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1668current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1669entire directory tree.
1670
1671The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1672"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1673is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1674"watched" by other developers.)
1675
22933be8
AS
1676The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1677(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1678an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1679starting at the given directory.
1680
54baed30
GM
1681*** Lisp Changes in VC
1682
1683VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1684add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1685library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1686then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1687a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1688provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1689of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1690you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1691`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1692
732b9cdd
GM
1693*** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
1694SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1695terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1696See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1697
a933dad1
DL
1698** New modes and packages
1699
79b9f6e0
MB
1700*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1701automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1702the default is not applicable.
1703
b95b34e5
GM
1704*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1705rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1706shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1707
1708Features are:
1709
1710- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1711 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1712 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1713 | / \
1714
1715- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1716 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1717 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1718 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1719 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1720 you are drawing.
1721
1722- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1723 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1724
1725- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1726 flood-filling.
1727
1728- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1729 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1730 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1731 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1732
b95b34e5
GM
1733- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1734 also do without the mouse.
1735
1736- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1737 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1738 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1739 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1740 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1741
1742- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1743
1744 lines straight-lines
1745 rectangles squares
1746 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1747 ellipses circles
1748 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1749 spray-can setting size for spraying
1750 vaporize line vaporize lines
1751 erase characters erase rectangles
1752
1753 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1754 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1755 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1756 drawing.
1757
1758 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1759 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1760 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1761 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1762
1763- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1764 can be turned off).
1765
4473cdd9
JW
1766+++
1767*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1768implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1769It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1770functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1771history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1772will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1773the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1774rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1775all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1776
ff332647 1777+++
90cbf47e
GM
1778*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1779intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1780typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1781on certain projects.
1782
894ca69e 1783+++
90cbf47e 1784*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1785regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1786
d96d6bb0 1787 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1788
1789will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1790face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1791typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1792Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1793appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1794current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1795corresponding file is read.
1796
424d8b44 1797+++
d96d6bb0 1798*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1799Emacs is idle.
1800
31fc5d15
GM
1801*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1802parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1803
5cb6a58e
SM
1804*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1805package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1806be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1807`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1808comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1809
424d8b44 1810+++
578979ee
GM
1811*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1812facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1813separate Texinfo file.
1814
424d8b44
DL
1815+++
1816*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1817by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1818provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1819`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1820enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1821
424d8b44 1822+++
6abca616
EZ
1823*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1824without invoking external programs.
1825
1826The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1827and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1828`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1829is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1830Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1831
1832The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1833page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1834
719e2c6e 1835+++
5e5dff44
GM
1836*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1837authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1838
1839The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1840the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1841the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1842Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1843even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1844single step.
1845
1846On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1847matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1848probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1849contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1850
424d8b44 1851+++
f7136ee8
GM
1852*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1853unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1854actually modifying content of a buffer.
1855
bbd9b566
GM
1856*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1857PostScript.
1858
1859Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1860
1861The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1862
1863 ; comment (until end of line)
1864 A non-terminal
1865 "C" terminal
1866 ?C? special
1867 $A default non-terminal
1868 $"C" default terminal
1869 $?C? default special
1870 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1871 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1872 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1873 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1874 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1875 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1876 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1877 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1878 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1879 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1880 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1881 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1882 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1883 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1884 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1885
1886Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1887
99453a38
GM
1888*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1889align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1890determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1891example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1892equal signs of assignments.
1893
424d8b44 1894+++
559cee90
DL
1895*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1896paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1897
424d8b44 1898+++
6448a6b3
GM
1899*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1900list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1901buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1902customize the package.
1903
6344985d
GM
1904*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1905
249652b1
GM
1906*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1907replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1908is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1909and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1910not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1911which answers different needs.
1912
424d8b44 1913+++
3476b54a
GM
1914*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1915suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1916expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1917course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1918reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1919to be enabled.
1920
424d8b44 1921+++
8964fec7
SM
1922*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1923containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1924
424d8b44 1925+++
a933dad1
DL
1926*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1927
424d8b44 1928+++
a933dad1
DL
1929*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1930
1931*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1932
0cb146bf 1933Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
8901d1ac
GM
1934`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1935disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1936`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1937displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1938and background colors.
1939
a933dad1
DL
1940*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1941Pascal) language.
1942
f6499c03 1943+++
a933dad1
DL
1944*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1945the text at point.
1946
1947*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1948
424d8b44 1949+++
8d54eb69
DL
1950*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1951
732b9cdd
GM
1952*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
1953whitespace in a file.
a933dad1 1954
ebcfda83
GM
1955*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1956files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1957(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1958interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1959often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1960uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1961codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1962
1963*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1964
1965Here is an example of columns:
1966
1967horse apple bus
1968dog pineapple car EXTRA
1969porcupine strawberry airplane
1970
1971Doing the following settings:
1972
1973 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1974 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1975 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1976 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1977
1978
1979Selecting the lines above and typing:
1980
1981 M-x delimit-columns-region
1982
1983It results:
1984
1985[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1986[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1987[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1988
1989delim-col has the following options:
1990
1991 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1992 before all columns.
1993
1994 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1995 between each column.
1996
1997 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1998 after all columns.
1999
2000 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
2001 each column.
2002
2003delim-col has the following commands:
2004
2005 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
2006 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
2007
424d8b44 2008+++
f507826c 2009*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
2010were operated on recently.
2011
2012M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 2013
31fc5d15
GM
2014M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
2015recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 2016
31fc5d15
GM
2017M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
2018filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
2019file list can be displayed:
f507826c 2020
31fc5d15
GM
2021- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
2022- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
2023- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 2024
31fc5d15
GM
2025The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2026dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 2027
8062f458
DL
2028*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2029text.
2030
424d8b44 2031+++
36e24b82 2032*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
2033of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2034specific to Message mode.
2035
424d8b44 2036+++
36e24b82
DL
2037*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2038viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2039with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2040
424d8b44 2041+++
aaa659ef
DL
2042*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2043interface to access directory servers using different directory
2044protocols. It has a separate manual.
2045
eee54b0e
DL
2046*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2047for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2048
424d8b44 2049+++
612839b6
GM
2050*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2051
5d94f558 2052*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2053minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2054
399da7e3
DL
2055*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2056with the diary features.
2057
6e417ca5
DL
2058*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2059numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2060
4a27bdfb
GM
2061*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2062Fill mode.
2063
60dd7e0e
DL
2064*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2065Gnus facilities.
2066
dace60cf
JW
2067*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2068facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2069difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2070they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2071
965bc065
DL
2072+++
2073** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2074paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2075
2076+++
2077** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2078to be visited as images.
2079
a933dad1
DL
2080** Withdrawn packages
2081
2082*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2083functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2084
3261c1d8
DL
2085*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2086
2087*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23 2088
0cb146bf 2089
01242779
DL
2090* Incompatible Lisp changes
2091
2092There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2093may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
3b6936cc 2094See the sections below for details.
01242779 2095
89d57763 2096** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
3b6936cc
DL
2097`(format %s foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
2098Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'.
01242779
DL
2099
2100** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2101which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2102may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2103these properties are active.
2104
4dd4cc14 2105** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2106ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2107
2108** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2109buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2110make a difference to some code.
2111
4dd4cc14
DL
2112** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2113operates on the minibuffer.
2114
7c94ccf6
EZ
2115** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2116cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2117different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2118(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2119Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2120character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2121multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2122encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2123reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2124sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2125a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2126the buffer as multibyte characters.
2127
2128Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2129MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2130appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2131
7a39158f 2132** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
3280fbe8
EZ
2133`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2134`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7a39158f
DL
2135
2136** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2137long promised.
2138
2a64f8c2
DL
2139** `scroll-left' and `scroll-right' are only effective when
2140`automatic-hscrolling' is nil.
2141
0cb146bf 2142
ce75fd23
GM
2143* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2144(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2145
a758f97d
GM
2146** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of of
2147function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2148args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2149(signal or normal termination).
2150
023045d6
DL
2151+++
2152** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2153from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2154
eb1b0c74
GM
2155+++
2156** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2157to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2158
52d89894
GM
2159+++
2160** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2161alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2162
693c4692 2163** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2164
1c14ba45 2165+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2166** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2167deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2168being deleted.
2169
1c14ba45 2170+++
39e776cd
SM
2171** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2172
a18a342d 2173+++
1396138a 2174** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2175If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2176skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2177with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2178C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2179charset.
2180
4fbdfdcf
MB
2181+++
2182** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2183the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2184message.
2185
6a0b0752
MB
2186** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2187expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2188
1c14ba45 2189+++
47e351a3
GM
2190** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2191with the more general `:mask' property.
2192
1c14ba45 2193+++
f864120f 2194** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
ba9eeda1 2195
a2bd77b8
GM
2196** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2197backslash.
2198
424d8b44
DL
2199+++
2200** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2201is running in batch mode. For example,
2202
2203 (message "%s" (read t))
2204
2205will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2206to standard output.
2207
2208+++
2209** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2210`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2211
ead53494
GM
2212** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2213will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2214frame or window.
2215
f6499c03 2216+++
27848c01
GM
2217** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2218were added
2219
2220- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2221
2222Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2223a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2224
2225- Function: remq ELT LIST
2226
2227Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2228comparison is done with `eq'.
2229
1c14ba45 2230+++
27848c01 2231** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2232
b548072f
GM
2233** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2234has been changed.
2235
424d8b44 2236+++
07b14857
KH
2237** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2238without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2239convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2240
1c14ba45 2241+++
9662da0b
GM
2242** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2243or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2244
7fce7efb
DL
2245** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2246function was declared obsolete.
2247
1c14ba45 2248+++
5d94f558 2249** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2250retained as an alias).
2251
f98d3086
SM
2252** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2253It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2254is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2255
87efd256
GM
2256** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2257
39b39373
GM
2258- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2259
2260Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2261omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2262the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2263even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2264minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2265means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2266
67c9a1d2
GM
2267** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2268
2269- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2270
2271Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2272
2273This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2274calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2275argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2276value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2277returned.
2278
2279Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2280if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2281it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2282minibuffer even if it is active.
2283
2284Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2285counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2286too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2287and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2288`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2289entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2290
2291ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2292ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2293ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2294ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2295ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2296If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2297Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2298
ead53494
GM
2299** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2300event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2301argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2302
25fa6deb
GM
2303** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2304call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2305message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2306Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2307
5d94f558 2308** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2309meaning no limit.
2310
5d94f558 2311** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2312coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2313DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2314
9b2999d0
DL
2315+++
2316** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2317list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2318
c286608e
SM
2319** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2320
9b2999d0 2321+++
80c05bd3
DL
2322** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2323buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2324This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2325than replacing the local map.
2326
14fd0da3
DL
2327** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2328`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2329removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2330instead.
45f485a6
GM
2331
2332** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2333
f6499c03 2334+++
c286608e
SM
2335** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2336as promised long ago.
f0298744 2337
5d94f558 2338** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
0cb146bf 2339
a933dad1
DL
2340* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2341
2342Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2343--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2344When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2345so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2346
85c75536
MB
2347*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2348buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2349the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2350restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2351
0b8a3a6d
DL
2352*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2353`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2354when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2355multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2356
2357*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2358`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2359contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2360
2361*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2362changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2363[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2364regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2365the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2366extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2367bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2368eight-bit-graphic.
2369
2370** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2371
2372A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2373a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2374character set as previously.
2375
2376*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2377They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2378modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2379
2380CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2381characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2382range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2383case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2384
2385FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2386name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2387
2388*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2389registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2390"fontset-default".
2391
2392*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2393argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2394
2395** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2396composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2397buffers and strings.
2398
2399*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2400character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2401code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2402have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2403composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2404composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2405The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2406also been deleted.
2407
2408*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2409specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2410`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2411
2412*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2413MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2414composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2415may differ between buffer and string text.
2416
2417*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2418COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2419
2420*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2421directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2422Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2423`composition' from STRING.
2424
2425*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2426a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2427
2428*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2429obsolete.
2430
965bc065 2431** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2432`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2433for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2434U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2435
23cfab61 2436** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' is added. It provides a limited
7acd9c90
EZ
2437support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For the details, please see
2438the documentation string of this coding system.
23cfab61 2439
0b8a3a6d
DL
2440** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2441`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2442X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2443
2444+++
2445** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2446are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 24470xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2448
399da7e3 2449+++
f0124b4a
DL
2450** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2451that offset in the file before writing.
2452
f98d3086
SM
2453** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2454compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2455
612839b6
GM
2456** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2457`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2458from which the command was issued.
2459
2460** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2461`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2462`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2463additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2464operate on.
2465
271b4185
GM
2466** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2467to `window-buffer-height'.
2468
2469- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2470
2471Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2472The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2473lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2474
2475Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2476respectively.
2477
2478If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2479COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2480
2481The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2482obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2483on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2484
2485Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2486buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2487possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2488is currently displayed in some window.
2489
3c30cb6e
DL
2490** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2491argument function's results.
2492
62f20204
GM
2493** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2494signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2495
c0510d27 2496** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2497header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2498
2499** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2500ignores differences in case and text representation.
2501
2502** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2503cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2504as follows:
2505
2506 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2507 nil don't display a cursor
2508 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2509 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2510 others display a box cursor.
2511
9a0dd3dc
GM
2512** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2513an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2514defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2515set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2516
d7b511c4 2517** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2518specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2519the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2520text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2521
2522Example:
2523
2524 (string-to-syntax "()")
2525 => (4 . 41)
2526
1fa28578
GM
2527** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2528other than 10.
2529
2530*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2531INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2532
5d94f558 2533 #b1111
1fa28578 2534 => 15
5d94f558 2535 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2536 => -15
2537
2538*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2539
5d94f558 2540 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2541 => 438
2542
2543*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2544
5d94f558 2545 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2546 => 48815
2547
2548*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2549
5d94f558 2550 #2R-111
1fa28578 2551 => -7
5d94f558 2552 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2553 => 267
2554
3d4ff2dd 2555** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2556the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2557and isn't a string.
2558
3d4ff2dd
GM
2559** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2560a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2561value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2562not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2563
16ce590d
DL
2564+++
2565** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2566
73825616 2567** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2568for a regexp in a string.
2569
2570** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2571`mouse-position-function'.
2572
723e779c
GM
2573** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2574that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2575
d1e103b2
GM
2576** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2577Keywords are now always considered constants.
2578
31047e0d
DL
2579+++
2580** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2581returns it.
2582
7a85e4df
GM
2583** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2584returned by function `recent-keys'.
2585
02b14400
RS
2586+++
2587** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2588can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2589Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2590etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2591mode.
404fa7d6 2592
02b14400 2593+++
8964fec7
SM
2594** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2595and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2596
02b14400
RS
2597+++
2598** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2599has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2600function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2601returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2602been performed."
2603
2604When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2605and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2606hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2607then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2608
02b14400 2609+++
81da8b32
GM
2610** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2611In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2612and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2613
02b14400 2614+++
9e207b90
GM
2615** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2616with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2617specified table.
2618
2619 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2620
2621Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2622TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2623saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2624what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2625
02b14400 2626+++
d7f89643 2627** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2628Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2629Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2630corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2631Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2632
02b14400 2633+++
dde9e75a
GM
2634** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2635removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2636
02b14400 2637+++
9da30515
GM
2638** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2639instead of being optional.
2640
02b14400 2641+++
d20679eb
GM
2642** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2643modify read-only text.
2644
02b14400 2645+++
fbc164de
PE
2646** New functions and variables for locales.
2647
2648The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2649decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2650time functions like strftime. The new variables
2651`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2652locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2653
2654The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2655environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2656the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2657environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2658not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2659`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2660`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2661
02b14400 2662+++
863476d1
SM
2663** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2664To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2665modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2666start sequences.
2667
02b14400 2668+++
ef6d912c
GM
2669** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2670because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2671
02b14400 2672+++
a933dad1
DL
2673** New function `propertize'
2674
2675The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2676strings with text properties.
2677
2678- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2679
2680Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2681by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2682PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2683specified value of that property. Example:
2684
2685 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2686
2687+++
2688** push and pop macros.
2689
02b14400
RS
2690Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2691are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2692as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2693
2694(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2695(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2696 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2697
02b14400
RS
2698** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2699
6c7fd5aa
RS
2700Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2701are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2702
2703(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2704 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2705 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2706 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2707
2708(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2709 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2710 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2711 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2712
a933dad1 2713+++
6c083b4c
GM
2714** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2715[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2716class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2717or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2718
2719[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2720[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2721[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2722[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2723[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2724 space, and DEL.
2725[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2726 and DEL.
2727[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2728 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2729 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2730[:alpha:] matches letters.
2731 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2732 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2733[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2734[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2735[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2736[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2737 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2738 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2739[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2740[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2741[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2742
2743+++
2744** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2745
2746The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2747
2748- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2749
2750The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2751are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2752
2753:test TEST
2754
2755TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2756Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2757it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2758
2759:size SIZE
2760
2761SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2762many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2763
2764:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2765
2766REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2767full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2768size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
27691.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2770old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2771
2772:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2773
2774THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2775hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2776(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2777
2778:weakness WEAK
2779
b548072f
GM
2780WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2781`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2782`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2783collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2784outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2785
2786- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2787
2788Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2789
2790- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2791
2792Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2793
2794- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2795
2796Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2797values are shared.
2798
2799- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2800
2801Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2802
2803- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2804
2805Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2806
2807- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2808
2809Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2810
2811- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2812
2813Returns the size of TABLE.
2814
d96d6bb0 2815- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2816
2817Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2818
2819- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2820
2821Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2822
2823- Function: clrhash TABLE
2824
2825Clear TABLE.
2826
2827- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2828
2829Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2830not found.
2831
79214ddf 2832- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2833
2834Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2835another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2836
2837- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2838
2839Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2840
2841- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2842
2843Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2844arguments KEY and VALUE.
2845
2846- Function: sxhash OBJ
2847
2848Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2849
2850- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2851
2852Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2853a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2854comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2855and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2856of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2857
2858TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2859
2860HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2861code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2862integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2863
2864Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2865be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2866
2867 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2868 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2869
2870 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2871 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2872
79214ddf 2873 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2874 'case-fold-string-hash))
2875
2876 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2877
2878+++
2879** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2880
2881It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2882circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2883a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2884
2885+++
2886** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2887
2888If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2889#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2890
a933dad1
DL
2891+++
2892** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2893t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2894specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2895is too short to reach that column.
2896
2897+++
2898** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2899now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2900after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2901two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2902
2903If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2904perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2905and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2906
2907+++
2908** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2909to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2910
2911+++
2912** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2913calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2914
2915+++
2916** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2917directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2918small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2919small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2920temporary-file-directory instead.
2921
2922+++
2923** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2924the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2925`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2926hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2927
2928+++
2929** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2930elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2931
2932+++
2933** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2934
2935make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2936creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2937ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2938
2939+++
2940** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2941
2942The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2943on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2944is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2945never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2946ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2947overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2948
2949If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2950that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2951to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2952The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2953
2954+++
2955** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2956
2957Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2958If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2959ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2960result string.
2961
2962Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2963string where arguments appear in the result string.
2964
2965Example:
2966
2967 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2968 (s2 "world"))
2969 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2970 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2971 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2972
2973results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2974
2975+++
2976** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2977
2978Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2979The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2980argument in it.
2981
2982 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2983 (arg "world"))
2984 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2985 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2986 (message msg arg))
2987
2988+++
2989** Sound support
2990
2991Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2992(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2993
2994Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2995(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2996to enable sound support.
2997
2998Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2999list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
3000when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
3001functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3002sound to play, before playing the sound.
3003
3004The following sound properties are supported:
3005
3006- `:file FILE'
3007
3008FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3009searched relative to `data-directory'.
3010
6fb40beb
GM
3011- `:data DATA'
3012
3013DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3014may be present, but not both.
3015
a933dad1
DL
3016- `:volume VOLUME'
3017
3018VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
30190..1. This property is optional.
3020
01242779
DL
3021- `:device DEVICE'
3022
3023DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3024sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3025
a933dad1
DL
3026Other properties are ignored.
3027
01242779
DL
3028An alternative interface is called as
3029(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3030
a933dad1 3031** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 3032
9b2999d0 3033+++
356673d4
DL
3034** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3035a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
3036
3037** Changes to garbage collection
3038
3039*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3040of live and free strings.
3041
3042*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3043strings that have been consed so far.
3044
0cb146bf 3045
04545643
GM
3046* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3047Lisp Manual
3048
f7eb32aa 3049+++
a299a6f0
GM
3050** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3051mini-windows.
3052
9b2999d0 3053+++
26fcde61
MB
3054** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3055argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3056returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3057
a299a6f0 3058** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3059
9a8d84ca
DL
3060+++
3061** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3062
9b2999d0 3063+++
2c69ced2
GM
3064** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3065image.
3066
3067- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3068
3069Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3070
3071SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3072measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3073character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3074font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3075FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3076
9b2999d0 3077+++
ebb8f116
GM
3078** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3079has a mask bitmap.
3080
3081- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3082
3083Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3084FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3085or omitted means use the selected frame.
3086
f6499c03 3087+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3088** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3089satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3090
3091+++
3092** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3093optional.
3094
f6499c03
DL
3095+++
3096** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3097below).
04545643 3098
0cb146bf 3099
a933dad1
DL
3100* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3101
3102Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3103--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3104When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3105so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3106
f6d3257b
GM
3107** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3108to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3109
3110Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3111text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3112is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3113your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3114laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3115just display it black instead.
3116
3117This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3118a line like
3119
3120 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3121
3122in your `.emacs'.
3123
a933dad1
DL
3124** New face implementation.
3125
3126Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3127font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3128
3129+++
3130*** New faces.
3131
3132Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3133
3134 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3135
a933dad1
DL
3136 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3137 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3138
a933dad1 3139 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3140
a933dad1 3141 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3142
a933dad1 3143 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3144
a933dad1 3145 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3146
a933dad1
DL
3147 7. Background color.
3148
3149 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3150
3151 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3152
3153 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3154
3155 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3156
3157 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3158 color.
3159
3160 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3161 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3162
3163Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3164same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3165frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3166faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3167with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3168attributes mentioned above.
3169
3170There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3171definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3172created frames.
79214ddf 3173
a933dad1
DL
3174A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3175have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3176`fully-specified'.
3177
3178+++
3179*** Face merging.
3180
3181The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3182combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3183aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3184properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3185that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3186results in a fully-specified face.
3187
3188+++
3189*** Face realization.
3190
3191After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3192merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3193realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3194available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3195face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3196cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3197
3198Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3199character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3200for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3201charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3202
3203Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3204specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3205being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3206the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3207statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3208
3209In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3210`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
32110x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3212the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3213initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3214Emacs.
3215
3216Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3217`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3218registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3219with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3220
a7c13351 3221+++
a933dad1
DL
3222**** Clearing face caches.
3223
3224The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3225on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3226unused fonts.
3227
3228+++
3229*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3230
a933dad1
DL
3231Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3232given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3233for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3234
3235If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3236pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3237family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3238property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3239an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3240
3241Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3242against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3243match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3244
3245Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3246
3247The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3248attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3249face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3250names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3251that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3252width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3253to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3254
52d89894
GM
3255Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3256alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
89d57763 3257doesn't exist.
af4bb4c8
KH
3258
3259Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3260all alternative font registry names to try for a face speciying a
3261registry.
3262
3263Please note that the iterpretations of the above two variables are
3264slightly different.
3265
3266Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3267
a933dad1
DL
3268
3269+++
3270**** Scalable fonts
3271
3272Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3273since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3274servers.
3275
3276To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3277`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3278scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3279Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3280scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3281that list. Example:
3282
3283 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3284
3285allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3286
3287+++
3288*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3289
3290- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3291
3292Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3293is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3294string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3295
3296If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3297the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3298FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3299POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3300SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3301These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3302if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3303REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3304the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3305of the face font sort order.
3306
79214ddf 3307- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3308
3309Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3310omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3311(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3312non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3313
3314- Variable: font-list-limit
3315
3316Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3317won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3318matching font. The default is currently 100.
3319
3320+++
3321*** Setting face attributes.
3322
3323For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3324with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3325implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3326`face-attribute'.
3327
3328Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3329symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3330
3331The following attributes are recognized:
3332
3333`:family'
3334
3335VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3336or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3337and `?' are allowed.
3338
3339`:width'
3340
3341VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3342It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3343`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3344`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3345
3346`:height'
3347
787345ff
MB
3348VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3349in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3350scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3351height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3352
3353`:weight'
3354
3355VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3356symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3357`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3358
3359`:slant'
3360
3361VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3362symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3363`reverse-oblique'.
3364
3365`:foreground', `:background'
3366
3367VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3368
3369`:underline'
3370
3371VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3372VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3373a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3374don't underline.
3375
3376`:overline'
3377
3378VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3379VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3380string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3381overline.
3382
3383`:strike-through'
3384
3385VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3386striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3387face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3388is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3389
3390`:box'
3391
3392VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3393around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3394VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3395of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3396and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3397VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3398:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3399the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3400specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3401defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3402the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3403color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3404should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3405like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3406that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3407the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3408box.
3409
3410`:inverse-video'
3411
3412VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3413inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3414
3415`:stipple'
3416
3417If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3418The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3419searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3420HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3421is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3422explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3423
3424For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3425and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3426
3427`:font'
3428
3429Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3430XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3431is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3432versions of Emacs.
3433
3434For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3435be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3436must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3437
3438Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3439`defface'.
3440
787345ff
MB
3441`:inherit'
3442
3443VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3444of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3445like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3446
a933dad1
DL
3447*** Face attributes and X resources
3448
3449The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3450from X resources:
3451
3452 Face attribute X resource class
3453-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3454 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3455 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3456 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3457 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3458 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3459 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3460 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3461 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3462 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3463 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3464 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3465 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3466 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3467 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3468 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3469 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3470 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3471 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3472 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3473
3474+++
3475*** Text property `face'.
3476
3477The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3478specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3479specification can be
3480
34811. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3482
34832. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3484 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3485 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3486 for face attribute names.
3487
34883. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3489 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3490 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3491
3492+++
3493** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3494
acf3ecb7
EZ
3495The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3496on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3497the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3498default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3499`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3500used to clear the mapping table.
3501
acf3ecb7
EZ
3502** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3503
3504The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3505and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3506type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3507color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3508display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3509old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3510`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3511compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3512should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3513modify their color-related behavior.
3514
3515The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3516any frame type.
3517
8a5719f0
EZ
3518** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3519
3520The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3521`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3522`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3523`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3524`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3525`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3526display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3527the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3528platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3529
a933dad1
DL
3530+++
3531** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3532
463cac2d 3533This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3534To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3535the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3536`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3537
3538The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3539end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3540Otherwise, it returns zero.
3541
463cac2d
GM
3542** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3543
3544There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3545buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3546property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3547
9a9dfda8 3548Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3549forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3550to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3551not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3552commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3553boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3554`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3555functions.
463cac2d
GM
3556
3557Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3558a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3559editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3560
9a9dfda8
GM
3561The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3562
59927f88 3563- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3564
3565Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3566
9a9dfda8
GM
3567A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3568If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3569constrained position if that is is different.
3570
3571If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3572positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3573ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3574constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3575as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3576is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3577fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3578the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3579also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3580
3581If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3582NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3583unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3584C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3585only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3586
59927f88
MB
3587If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3588a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3589
3590Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3591
3592- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3593
59927f88 3594Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3595A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3596If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3597
3598- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3599
3600Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3601A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3602If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3603If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3604field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3605
3606- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3607
3608Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3609A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3610If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3611If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3612then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3613
3614- Function: field-string &optional POS
3615
3616Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3617A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3618If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3619
3620- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3621
3622Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3623A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3624If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3625
a933dad1
DL
3626+++
3627** Image support.
3628
3629Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3630strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3631(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3632replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3633
3634If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3635`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3636AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3637window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3638area.
3639
3640IMAGE is an image specification.
3641
3642*** Image specifications
3643
3644Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3645is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3646specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3647symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3648described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3649
3650The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3651
3652`:ascent ASCENT'
3653
576da55d
GM
3654ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3655If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3656to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3657
3658If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3659image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3660
5d94f558 3661If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3662centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3663of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3664overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3665
3666`:margin MARGIN'
3667
b30623be
GM
3668MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
3669as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
3670horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
a933dad1
DL
3671
3672`:relief RELIEF'
3673
3674RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3675around an image.
3676
f864120f 3677`:conversion ALGO'
a933dad1 3678
47e351a3
GM
3679Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3680
3681ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3682edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3683
3684ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3685apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3686nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3687position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3688around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3689neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3690transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3691x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3692below.
3693
3694 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3695 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3696 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3697
3698The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3699resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3700multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3701of the factors' absolute values.
3702
327652be 3703Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3704
47e351a3
GM
3705 (1 0 0
3706 0 0 0
3707 9 9 -1)
3708
3709Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3710
3711 ( 2 -1 0
3712 -1 0 1
3713 0 1 -2)
3714
ba9eeda1
GM
3715ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3716``disabled''.
3717
47e351a3
GM
3718`:mask MASK'
3719
3720If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3721the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3722image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3723background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3724image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3725the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3726GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3727image.
a933dad1 3728
47e351a3
GM
3729If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3730in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3731`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3732
3733`:file FILE'
3734
3735Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3736search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3737building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3738may be present in the image specification.
3739
518df5c4
GM
3740`:data DATA'
3741
3742Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3743supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3744present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3745support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3746
a933dad1
DL
3747*** Supported image types
3748
b246b1f6 3749**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3750
3751XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3752properties supported are
3753
3754`:foreground FG'
3755
3756FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3757is the frame's foreground.
3758
46c5af7f 3759`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3760
3761BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3762the frame's background color.
3763
3764XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3765case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3766instead of a `:file' property.
3767
3768`:width WIDTH'
3769
3770WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3771
3772`:height HEIGHT'
3773
3774HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3775
3776`:data DATA'
3777
3778DATA must be either
3779
3780 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3781 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3782
3783 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3784
3785 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3786 bitmap.
3787
c76e04a8
GM
3788 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3789 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3790 in the file.
3791
a933dad1
DL
3792**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3793
3794XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3795`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3796found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3797`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3798
3799Additional image properties supported are:
3800
3801`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3802
3803SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3804name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3805name.
3806
3807XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3808add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3809
a933dad1
DL
3810The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3811to display compressed images.
3812
3813**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3814
3815PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3816mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3817mono images are
3818
3819`:foreground FG'
3820
3821FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3822is the frame's foreground.
3823
3824`:background FG'
3825
3826BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3827the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3828
3829**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3830
3831Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3832package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3833are:
3834
a933dad1
DL
3835**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3836
3837Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3838package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3839properties defined.
3840
3841**** GIF, image type `gif'
3842
3843Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3844`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3845
3846Additional image properties supported are:
3847
3848`:index INDEX'
3849
3850INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3851multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3852
3853This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3854For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3855at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3856every 0.1 seconds.
3857
3858(defun show-anim (file max)
3859 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3860 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3861
3862(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3863 (when (= idx max)
3864 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3865 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3866 (save-excursion
3867 (set-buffer buffer)
3868 (goto-char (point-min))
3869 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3870 (insert-image img "x"))
3871 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3872
3873**** PNG, image type `png'
3874
3875Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3876package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3877properties defined.
3878
3879**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3880
3881Additional image properties supported are:
3882
3883`:pt-width WIDTH'
3884
3885WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3886integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3887
3888`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3889
3890HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3891must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3892
3893`:bounding-box BOX'
3894
3895BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3896the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3897files. This is an required property.
3898
3899Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3900lisp/gs.el.
3901
3902*** Lisp interface.
3903
79214ddf
FP
3904The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3905which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3906
3907Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3908they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3909The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3910manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3911images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3912
3913*** Simplified image API, image.el
3914
3915The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3916creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3917can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3918define an image based on available image types. The functions
3919`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3920buffer.
3921
3922+++
3923** Display margins.
3924
3925Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3926and images.
3927
3928To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3929`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3930`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3931obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3932`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3933the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3934of the display margins.
3935
3936You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3937containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3938one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3939string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3940in this file).
3941
3942+++
3943** Help display
3944
3945Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3946moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3947`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3948that have a `help-echo' property.
3949
9662da0b 3950If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3951is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3952the window in which the help was found.
3953
3954If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3955`help-echo' text property was found.
3956
3957If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3958POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3959
3960If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3961the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3962mouse.
d5aa31d8 3963
9662da0b
GM
3964If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3965string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3966
3967For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3968determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3969property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3970For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3971used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3972
3973The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3974the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3975causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3976
3977+++
3978** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3979
3980The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3981This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3982
3983The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3984scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3985The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3986scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3987used.
3988
79214ddf
FP
3989 (global-set-key [A-down]
3990 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3991 (interactive)
79214ddf 3992 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3993 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3994 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3995 #'(lambda ()
3996 (interactive)
79214ddf 3997 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3998 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3999
4000+++
4001** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4002
4003Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4004when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4005variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4006is called with one argument, POS.
4007
4008At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4009characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4010as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4011property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4012`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4013
4014+++
4015** Tool bar support.
4016
4017Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4018parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4019controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4020suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4021`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4022automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4023
4024*** Tool bar item definitions
4025
4026Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4027`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4028where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 4029
a933dad1
DL
4030CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4031evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4032the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4033property (see below).
79214ddf 4034
a933dad1
DL
4035BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4036binding are currently ignored.
4037
4038The following properties are recognized:
4039
4040`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 4041
a933dad1
DL
4042FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4043or disabled.
79214ddf 4044
a933dad1 4045`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 4046
a933dad1 4047FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 4048
a933dad1
DL
4049`:filter FUNCTION'
4050
4051FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4052FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4053used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4054
a933dad1
DL
4055`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4056
4057TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4058and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4059
a933dad1
DL
4060`:image IMAGES'
4061
4062IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4063image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4064meaning of each of the four elements:
4065
4066 Index Use when item is
4067 ----------------------------------------
4068 0 enabled and selected
4069 1 enabled and deselected
4070 2 disabled and selected
4071 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4072
4ba7246d
GM
4073If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4074algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4075
a933dad1 4076`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4077
a933dad1
DL
4078Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4079is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4080
dab96841 4081The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4082toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4083to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4084menu bar.
dab96841 4085
8628686a
DL
4086The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4087dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4088buffer-locally to override the global map.
4089
a933dad1
DL
4090*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4091
4092If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4093resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4094than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4095
79214ddf 4096If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4097raised when the mouse moves over them.
4098
4099You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4100`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
b30623be
GM
4101pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4102vertical margins . Default is 1.
a933dad1
DL
4103
4104You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4105`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4106
4107*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4108
4109You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4110a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4111
4112 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4113 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4114 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4115
4116is the original tool bar item definition, then
4117
4118 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4119
4120makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4121item.
4122
4123** Mode line changes.
4124
4125+++
4126*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4127
4128The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4129that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4130a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4131
41321. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4133a `local-map' text property.
4134
41352. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4136that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4137
41383. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4139is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4140`local-map' property.
4141
4142The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4143properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4144example.
4145
54522c9f
GM
4146*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4147evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4148
a933dad1
DL
4149+++
4150*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4151variable mode-line-format to nil.
4152
4153+++
4154*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4155
4156This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4157`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4158completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4159`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4160line.
4161
4162The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4163`header-line'.
4164
4165The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4166position in the header-line.
4167
4168+++
4169** Text property `display'
4170
623a0aae
GM
4171The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4172replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4173also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4174the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4175below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4176
623a0aae
GM
4177*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4178
4179To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4180text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4181
4182If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4183marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4184the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4185is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4186simpler form STRING as property value.
4187
a933dad1
DL
4188*** Variable width and height spaces
4189
4190To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4191specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4192`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4193area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4194marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4195displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4196simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4197
4198The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4199PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4200properties described below.
4201
4202The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4203characters having the `display' property.
4204
4205- :width WIDTH
4206
4207Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4208character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4209
4210- :relative-width FACTOR
4211
4212Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4213first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4214same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4215width of that character by FACTOR.
4216
4217- :align-to HPOS
4218
4219Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4220value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4221
4222Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4223
4224- :height HEIGHT
4225
4226Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4227normal line height.
4228
4229- :relative-height FACTOR
4230
4231The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4232of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4233
4234- :ascent ASCENT
4235
4236Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4237used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4238baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4239equal to 100.
4240
4241You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4242
4243*** Images
4244
4245A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4246. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4247in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4248their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4249the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4250`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4251area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4252the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4253as display specification.
4254
4255*** Other display properties
4256
c9e73000 4257- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4258
4259Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4260should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4261integer or float.
4262
c9e73000 4263- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4264
4265Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4266
4267If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4268means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4269the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4270``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4271a font is available counts as a step.
4272
4273If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4274as tall as the frame's default font.
4275
4276If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4277height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4278
4279Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4280`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4281
c9e73000 4282- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4283
4284FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4285font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4286raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4287amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4288`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4289
4290*** Conditional display properties
4291
4292All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4293has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4294applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4295During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4296the text having the `display' property.
4297
4298The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4299`(:when t SPEC)'.
4300
4301+++
4302** New menu separator types.
4303
4304Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4305item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4306treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4307to specify other menu separator types.
4308
4309- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4310
4311No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4312separator occurs.
4313
4314- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4315
4316A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4317
4318- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4319
4320A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4321
4322- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4323
4324A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4325
4326- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4327
4328A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4329
4330- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4331
4332A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4333displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4334
4335- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4336
4337A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4338
4339- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4340
4341A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4342
4343- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4344
4345A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4346
4347- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4348
4349Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4350
4351- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4352
4353Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4354
4355- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4356
4357Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4358
4359- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4360
4361Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4362
4363Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4364the corresponding single-line separators.
4365
4366+++
4367** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4368
4369The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4370`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4371Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4372that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4373default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4374default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4375default foreground is black.
4376
4377The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4378(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4379`ScrollBarBackground').
4380
4381Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4382settings for scroll bar colors.
4383
4384+++
4385** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4386display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4387
4388---
4389** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4390starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4391on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4392line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4393the original window start.
4394
4395---
4396** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4397`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4398now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4399
4400+++
4401** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4402
4403A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4404`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4405windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4406other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4407
4408The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4409fixed-width and fixed-height.
4410
4411 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4412
4413A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4414fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4415window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4416change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4417temporarily to nil, for example
4418
4419 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4420 (enlarge-window 10))
4421
79214ddf 4422Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4423or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4424
4425** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4426terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4427to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4428overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4429horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4430support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4431
3787e12e 4432
0cb146bf 4433
3787e12e
GM
4434* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4435
4436** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4437input.
4438
4439** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4440
4441** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4442
4443** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4444only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4445exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4446(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4447(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4448
4449** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4450been added.
4451
0cb146bf 4452
3787e12e
GM
4453* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4454
4455** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4456
0cb146bf 4457
3787e12e
GM
4458* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4459
4460** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4461M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
0cb146bf 4462
3787e12e
GM
4463* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4464
4465** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4466
4467You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4468Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4469`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4470
4471If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4472is the one that is used.
4473
4474** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4475the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4476Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4477separate from the command's regular output.
4478Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4479says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4480In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4481the buffer name.
4482
4483When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4484output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4485it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4486cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4487
4488** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4489the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4490is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4491created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4492
4493** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4494example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4495match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4496quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4497
4498** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4499now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4500if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4501they never ignore case.
4502
4503** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4504under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4505applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4506of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4507just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4508convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4509part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4510
4511If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4512the same format that was used in the file before.
4513
4514You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4515`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4516
4517** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4518renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4519This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4520
4521** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4522The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4523buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4524your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4525is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4526end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4527Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4528
4529The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4530eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4531control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4532format. You can now customize these variables.
4533
4534** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4535filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4536filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4537enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4538
4539** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4540in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4541windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4542
4543** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4544dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4545doesn't have any effect.
4546
4547** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4548not one per buffer.
4549
4550** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4551use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4552 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4553
4554** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4555To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4556`auto-show-mode' command.
4557
4558** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4559avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4560versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4561choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4562occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4563
4564** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4565cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4566
4567** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4568character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4569feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4570
4571** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4572the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4573interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4574and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4575
4576** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4577
4578The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4579that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4580one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4581codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4582set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4583
4584Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4585from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4586
4587IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4588equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4589a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4590`?' on other systems.
4591
4592IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4593feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4594Unix.
4595
4596Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4597current codepage when it starts.
4598
4599** Mail changes
4600
4601*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4602`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4603appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4604non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4605MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4606headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4607latin-1:
4608
4609 MIME-version: 1.0
4610 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4611 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4612
4613*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4614default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4615default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4616sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4617buffer-file-coding-system.
4618
4619You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4620sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4621mail.
4622
4623*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4624if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4625Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4626list of possible coding systems.
4627
4628** CC Mode changes
4629
4630*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4631modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4632longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4633docstring for details.
4634
4635*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4636symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4637found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4638prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4639lineup functions use this feature currently.
4640
4641*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4642"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4643
4644*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4645"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4646
4647*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4648from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4649symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4650c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4651anonymous classes.
4652
4653*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4654syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4655
4656*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4657inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4658support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4659function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4660
4661*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4662(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4663brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4664c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4665(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4666
4667*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4668
4669*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4670
4671*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4672for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4673
4674*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4675
4676*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4677associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4678This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4679circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4680class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4681
4682** Gnus changes.
4683
4684*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4685added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4686Gnus manual for the full story.
4687
4688*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4689before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4690group, which is created automatically.
4691
4692*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4693values.
4694
4695*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4696
4697*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4698outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4699
4700*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4701`C-u C-c C-c'.
4702
4703*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4704
4705*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4706re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4707
4708*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4709
4710*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4711Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4712
4713*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4714`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4715
4716*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4717control over simplification.
4718
4719*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4720
4721*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4722limit.
4723
4724*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4725
4726*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4727
4728*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4729If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4730rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4731
4732*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4733`a' forces normal posting method.
4734
4735*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4736-- `W d'.
4737
4738*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4739to a non-nil value.
4740
4741*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4742where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4743
4744*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4745has been added.
4746
4747*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4748
4749*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4750
4751*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4752`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4753
4754*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4755`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4756
4757*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4758
4759*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4760been added.
4761
4762*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4763`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4764
4765*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4766updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4767
4768*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4769
4770*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4771
4772*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4773
4774** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4775
4776*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4777options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4778nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4779
4780*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4781TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4782of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4783TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4784can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4785
4786*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4787All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4788but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4789the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4790
4791*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4792the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4793buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4794mismatch.
4795
4796** Changes to RefTeX mode
4797
4798*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4799file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4800
4801*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4802lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4803characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4804removed from the label.
4805
4806*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4807a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4808
4809*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4810customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4811
4812*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4813`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4814expressions.
4815
4816*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4817
4818** New/deleted modes and packages
4819
4820*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4821SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4822
4823*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4824editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4825SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4826
4827*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4828changes with a special face.
4829
4830*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4831this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4832Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
0cb146bf 4833
3787e12e
GM
4834* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4835
4836** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4837This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4838conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4839and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4840check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4841
4842The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4843Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4844distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4845
4846** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4847MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4848controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4849directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4850Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4851on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4852string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4853program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4854printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4855
4856** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4857output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4858available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4859input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4860temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4861program.
4862
4863An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4864and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4865programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4866automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4867as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4868ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4869
4870** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4871a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4872MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4873was not documented clearly before.
4874
4875** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4876This includes Tetris and Snake.
0cb146bf 4877
3787e12e
GM
4878* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4879
4880** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4881return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4882They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4883meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4884
4885** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4886WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4887and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4888
4889** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4890
4891*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4892It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4893
4894*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4895the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4896integers.
4897
4898** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4899files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4900arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4901file names and attributes are returned.
4902
4903** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4904sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4905accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4906It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4907returns the result.
4908
4909** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4910to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4911
4912** New functions for base64 conversion:
4913
4914The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4915into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4916performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4917optionally.
4918
4919Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4920job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4921
4922**
4923The new function process-running-child-p
4924will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4925terminal to its own child process.
4926
4927** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4928when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4929to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4930itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4931
4932** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4933be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4934
4935** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4936:included is an alias for :visible.
4937
4938easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4939easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4940to move or copy menu entries.
4941
4942** Multibyte editing changes
4943
4944*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4945an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4946make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4947work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4948char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4949 (setq char (sref str idx)
4950 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4951The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4952
4953If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4954(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4955 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4956
4957*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4958region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4959deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4960
4961 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4962
4963This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4964across the boundary.
4965
4966*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4967`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4968 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4969 contains 8-bit characters.
4970 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4971 contains invalid characters.
4972
4973*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4974text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4975preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4976text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4977way.
4978
4979*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4980If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4981end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4982prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4983
4984*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4985compose Thai characters in a string.
4986
4987** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4988argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4989for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4990menus should always use the third argument.
4991
4992** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4993read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4994arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4995input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4996
4997** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4998of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4999programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
5000inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
5001
5002** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5003the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5004returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5005echo area contents.
5006
5007 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5008
5009** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5010NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5011requested feature cannot be loaded.
5012
5013** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5014foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5015means to clear out that attribute.
5016
5017** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5018gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5019
5020** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5021read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5022unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5023end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5024
5025** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5026the gap of the current buffer.
5027
5028** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5029to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5030current buffer.
5031
5032** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5033facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5034These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5035it back in after any modifications have been made.
0cb146bf 5036
3787e12e
GM
5037* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5038
5039** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5040the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5041/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5042directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5043subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5044
5045Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5046names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5047Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5048which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5049these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5050
5051Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5052starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5053time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5054
5055This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5056Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5057to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5058subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5059`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5060results.
5061
5062** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5063GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5064that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5065fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
0cb146bf 5066
3787e12e
GM
5067* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5068
5069** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5070including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5071it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5072perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5073
5074** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5075specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5076region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5077further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5078command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5079within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5080are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5081region.
5082
5083In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5084selective undo.
5085
5086** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5087unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5088buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5089effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5090Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5091
5092The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5093though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5094-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5095load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5096
5097** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5098no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5099enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5100something that most users not do.
5101
5102** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5103operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5104The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5105applications.
5106
5107C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5108pasting operations.
5109
5110** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5111setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5112like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5113printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5114`ps-printer-name'.
5115
5116** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5117minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5118any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5119except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5120incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5121hits a new word.
5122
5123Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5124Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5125to be confused by TeX commands.
5126
5127You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5128correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5129clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5130of various alternative replacements and actions.
5131
5132Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5133the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5134corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5135alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5136flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5137
5138Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5139flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5140
5141** Changes in input method usage.
5142
5143Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5144the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5145respectively.
5146
5147You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5148
5149If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5150of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5151
5152The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5153that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5154
5155 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5156
5157 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5158
5159 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5160 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5161
5162 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5163 given in the following case:
5164 o When you are using a complex input method.
5165 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5166
5167If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5168input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5169and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5170setting it to t is helpful.
5171
5172The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5173
5174In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5175keys:
5176 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5177 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5178 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5179These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5180environment.
5181
5182** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5183names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5184minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5185get
5186
5187 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5188
5189which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5190
5191Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5192Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5193
5194** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5195at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5196its owner and group.
5197
5198** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5199Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5200
5201** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5202contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5203
5204** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5205which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5206in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5207by the left edge of the rectangle.
5208
5209** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5210increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5211C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5212for writing keyboard macros.
5213
5214** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5215files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5216frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5217the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5218additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5219info.
5220
5221** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5222
5223** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5224query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5225contents only.
5226
5227** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5228confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5229the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5230says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5231
5232** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5233non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5234literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5235
5236** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5237now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5238Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5239inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5240
5241** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5242failure if the command produces no output.
5243
5244** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5245manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5246the mouse.
5247
5248** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5249mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5250function and variable names.
5251
5252** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5253reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5254file-coding-system-alist.
5255
5256** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5257t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5258converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5259the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5260according to the current fontset.
5261
5262** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5263
5264The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5265that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5266nonascii-insert-offset.
5267
5268For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5269enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5270nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5271characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5272
5273** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5274an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5275
5276** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5277letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5278
5279** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5280are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5281command keys.
5282
5283** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5284user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5285
5286Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5287user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5288all variables that have documentation.
5289
5290** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5291shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5292that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5293minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5294it should show; the default is 20.
5295
5296Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5297the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5298of your input.
5299
5300** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5301all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5302recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5303argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5304the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5305Newly added options are included as well.
5306
5307If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5308then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5309for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5310
5311This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5312Customize menu.
5313
5314** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5315the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5316
5317** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5318buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5319invoked.
5320
5321** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5322that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5323The default is 1.
5324
5325** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5326syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5327new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5328(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5329sensibly.
5330
5331** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5332
5333** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5334value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5335two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5336
5337** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5338reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5339for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5340every night.
5341
5342** Desktop changes
5343
5344*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5345the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5346
5347*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5348and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5349
5350** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5351read and post multi-lingual articles.
5352
5353** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5354doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5355be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5356outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5357the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5358made invisible again.
5359
5360** Mail reading and sending changes
5361
5362*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5363the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5364changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5365toggle.
5366
5367*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5368now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5369summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5370the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5371rmail-default-body-file.
5372
5373*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5374longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5375handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5376
5377*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5378it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5379is evaluated to insert the signature.
5380
5381*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5382outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5383handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5384putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5385transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5386especially interested in trying feedmail.
5387
5388feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5389feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5390provided by feedmail are:
5391
5392**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5393stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5394there is also a queue for draft messages
5395
5396**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5397be prompted for confirmation
5398
5399**** does smart filling of address headers
5400
5401**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5402the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5403can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5404
5405**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5406the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5407/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5408function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5409
5410** Dired changes
5411
5412*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5413files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5414
5415*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5416run Dired on the directory name at point.
5417
5418*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5419files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5420for a specified regexp.
5421
5422** VC Changes
5423
5424*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5425conveniently.
5426
5427*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5428faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5429Dired.
5430
5431VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5432directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5433listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5434currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5435
5436You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5437then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5438vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5439control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5440on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5441
5442All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5443is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5444`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5445the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5446`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5447
5448The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5449toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5450VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5451`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5452
5453Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5454ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5455command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5456
5457*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5458file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5459session to resolve them.
5460
5461Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5462resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5463contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5464uses as well).
5465
5466*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5467command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5468you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5469either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5470branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5471If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5472using ediff.
5473
5474** Changes in Font Lock
5475
5476*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5477are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5478use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5479unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5480compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5481
5482** Frame name display changes
5483
5484*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5485frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5486raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5487when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5488
5489*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5490frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5491menu.
5492
5493** Comint (subshell) changes
5494
5495*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5496subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5497with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5498
5499*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5500
5501C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5502that is, the line after the last line you got.
5503You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5504
5505C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5506send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5507the following line.
5508
5509C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5510which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5511previously sent input.
5512
5513C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5514it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5515as the search string.
5516
5517*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5518automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5519
5520** C mode changes
5521
5522*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5523and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5524assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5525definition.
5526
5527*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5528(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5529Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5530style is still the default however.
5531
5532*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5533
5534*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5535are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5536them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5537
5538*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5539and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5540
5541*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5542namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5543
5544*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5545makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5546
5547*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5548c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5549
5550*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5551should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5552package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5553variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5554
5555** Changes to hippie-expand.
5556
5557*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5558non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5559which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5560
5561*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5562non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5563expanding dynamically.
5564
5565*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5566non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5567
5568*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5569non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5570this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5571expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5572
5573*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5574
5575** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5576
5577*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5578bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5579automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5580bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5581against the first word in the title.
5582
5583*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5584capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5585bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5586lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5587lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5588bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5589
5590*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5591generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5592replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5593bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5594
5595** Changes in vcursor.el.
5596
5597*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5598and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5599variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5600entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5601`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5602in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5603
5604*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5605Editing group once the package is loaded.
5606
5607*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5608generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5609vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5610
5611*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5612vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5613
5614** Ispell changes.
5615
5616*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5617buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5618are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5619
5620*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5621A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5622and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5623defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5624include:
5625
5626 o URLs are automatically skipped
5627 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5628
5629*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5630
5631** Changes to RefTeX mode
5632
5633RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5634large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5635re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5636section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5637
5638*** New recursive parser.
5639
5640The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5641entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5642recursive parser scans the individual files.
5643
5644*** Parsing only part of a document.
5645
5646Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5647partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5648the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5649
5650 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5651
5652*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5653
5654This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5655
5656 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5657
5658*** Using multiple selection buffers
5659
5660If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5661for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5662
5663 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5664
5665*** References to external documents.
5666
5667The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5668documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5669documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5670macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5671RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5672the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5673The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5674
5675*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5676
5677The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5678and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5679
5680Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5681the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5682
5683*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5684
5685The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5686buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5687
5688*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5689
5690The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5691contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5692`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5693have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5694enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5695at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5696more.
5697
5698*** Support for the varioref package
5699
5700The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5701
5702*** New hooks
5703
5704Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5705and citations are created. These hooks are
5706`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5707`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5708
5709*** Citations outside LaTeX
5710
5711The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5712a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5713
5714*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5715
5716The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5717fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5718fontified, use
5719
5720 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5721
5722** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5723With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5724the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5725directories that contain the same file name.
5726
5727Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5728Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5729file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5730Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5731have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5732names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5733directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5734directory.
5735
5736** New modes and packages
5737
5738*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5739It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5740it, but some do not.
5741
5742*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5743code.
5744
5745*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5746current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5747around in a buffer.
5748
5749Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5750
5751*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5752uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5753be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5754established system of notation similar to Chess.
5755
5756*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5757documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5758guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5759
5760*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5761available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5762system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5763simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5764functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5765the like.
5766
5767*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5768identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5769
5770*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5771within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5772used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5773the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5774
5775*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5776
5777 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5778 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5779 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5780 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5781 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5782 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5783 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5784 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5785 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5786 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5787 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5788
5789 Platform-specific modes:
5790
5791 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5792 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5793 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5794 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5795 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5796 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5797 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5798 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5799 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
0cb146bf 5800
3787e12e
GM
5801* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5802
5803** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5804use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5805That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5806Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5807
5808Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5809you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5810consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5811
5812** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5813and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5814specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5815searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5816
5817** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5818multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5819character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5820environment.
5821
5822** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5823take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5824string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5825current input method for reading this one event.
5826
5827** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5828now control whether to output certain characters as
5829backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5830non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5831characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5832in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
0cb146bf 5833
3787e12e
GM
5834* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5835
5836** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5837of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5838
5839** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5840in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5841always increases point by 1.
5842
5843The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5844considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5845
5846See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5847
5848** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5849Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5850default value changed. For example,
5851
5852 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5853 :type 'integer
5854 :group 'foo
5855 :version "20.3")
5856
5857 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5858 :version "20.3")
5859
5860If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5861default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5862is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5863`:version' in the top level group.
5864
5865This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5866
5867** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5868starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5869
5870However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5871symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5872support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5873to themselves.
5874
5875If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5876this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5877values whatever.
5878
5879** There is a new debugger command, R.
5880It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5881in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5882
5883** Frame-local variables.
5884
5885You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5886the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5887local bindings for that variable.
5888
5889These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5890frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5891modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5892parameter name.
5893
5894Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5895Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5896active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5897that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5898
5899It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5900clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5901very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5902through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5903
5904** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5905"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5906evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5907makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5908See the documentation in sregex.el.
5909
5910** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5911is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5912parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5913The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5914
5915** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5916If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5917
5918** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5919known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5920define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5921
5922** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5923when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5924it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5925history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5926
5927The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5928return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5929empty input.
5930
5931** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5932for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5933`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5934Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5935`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5936
5937** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5938echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5939a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5940default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5941
5942** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5943specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5944function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5945place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5946non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5947
5948** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5949If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5950up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5951end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5952
5953** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5954which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5955If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5956
5957** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5958holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5959was directed to display this buffer.
5960
5961** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5962with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5963describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5964other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5965set-window-configuration.
5966
5967** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5968window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5969positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5970windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5971
5972** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5973override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5974look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5975
5976If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5977non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5978map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5979
5980minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5981and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5982
5983** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5984except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5985
5986** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5987USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5988floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5989
5990** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5991to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5992in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5993it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5994
5995** Menu changes
5996
5997*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5998keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5999better supported.
6000
6001The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6002a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6003you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6004can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6005then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6006
6007*** A new format for menu items is supported.
6008
6009In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6010 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6011defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6012starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6013
6014The format is:
6015 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6016 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6017where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6018string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6019The supported properties include
6020
6021:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6022 item is enabled.
6023:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6024 item should appear in the menu.
6025:filter FILTER-FN
6026 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6027 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6028 It should return a binding to use instead.
6029:keys DESCRIPTION
6030 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
6031 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
6032 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6033:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6034 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6035 keyboard binding.
6036:key-sequence nil
6037 This means that the command normally has no
6038 keyboard equivalent.
6039:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6040:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6041 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6042 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6043 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6044
6045Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6046Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6047
6048(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6049
6050** New event types
6051
6052*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6053mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6054corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6055which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6056
6057 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6058
6059where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6060same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6061indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6062negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6063the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6064forward, away from the user.
6065
6066As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6067
6068*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6069files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6070and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6071filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6072loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6073
6074 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6075
6076where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6077same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6078that were dragged and dropped.
6079
6080As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6081
6082** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6083
6084*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6085any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6086to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6087
6088*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6089can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6090that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6091
6092*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6093in Emacs 19 and before.
6094
6095The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6096The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6097
6098*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6099buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6100unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6101representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6102
6103This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6104as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6105viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6106one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6107will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6108
6109This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6110representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6111(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6112consistent with the new representation.
6113
6114*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6115representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6116about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6117however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6118
6119The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6120nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6121using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6122
6123*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6124representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6125representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6126
6127The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6128loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6129is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6130
6131*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6132which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6133
6134*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6135which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6136
6137*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6138portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6139so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6140You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6141
6142*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6143it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6144
6145*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6146convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6147buffer or string being searched.
6148
6149One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6150[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6151searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6152searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6153obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6154you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6155expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6156
6157*** Structure of coding system changed.
6158
6159All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6160by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6161which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6162as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6163vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6164your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6165define-coding-system-alias.
6166
6167The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6168the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6169access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6170pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6171character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6172safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6173'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6174`iso-8859-1'.
6175
6176Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6177The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6178coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6179(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6180
6181Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6182also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6183are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6184the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6185
6186*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6187proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6188This function requires a user interaction.
6189
6190*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6191find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6192select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6193systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6194a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6195select-safe-coding-system.
6196
6197*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6198decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6199last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6200was done.
6201
6202*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6203used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6204coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6205
6206*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6207return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6208characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6209`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6210
6211*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6212coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6213coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6214converted.
6215
6216*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6217coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6218
6219*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6220character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6221character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6222each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6223either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6224range of characters.
6225
6226*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6227Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6228
6229*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6230in the current buffer at position POS.
6231
6232*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6233input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6234function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6235character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6236event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6237binding input-method-function to nil.
6238
6239The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6240method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6241input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6242the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6243not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6244
6245The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6246subsequent events of a key sequence.
6247
6248*** You can customize any language environment by using
6249set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6250
6251The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6252customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6253instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6254environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6255exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
0cb146bf 6256
3787e12e
GM
6257* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6258
6259** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6260options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6261at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6262tree structure.
6263
6264M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6265user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6266
6267With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6268session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6269in your .emacs file.)
6270
6271** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6272You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6273
6274** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6275This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6276
6277** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6278immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6279kills the region.
6280
6281The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6282delete the character before point, as usual.
6283
6284** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6285on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6286by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6287
6288** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6289insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6290the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6291onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6292history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6293past.)
6294
6295** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6296This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6297in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6298TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6299makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6300
6301As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6302and is an alias for it.
6303
6304If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6305use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6306
6307** Scrolling changes
6308
6309*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6310position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6311
6312In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6313on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6314where it started.
6315
6316*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6317move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6318screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6319does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6320
6321*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6322top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6323comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6324recenters the window.
6325
6326** International character set support (MULE)
6327
6328Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6329including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6330Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6331Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6332features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6333MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6334
6335Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6336coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6337character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6338variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6339into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6340
6341Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6342generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6343supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6344language, to make it possible to type them.
6345
6346The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6347character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6348
6349The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6350to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6351
6352You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6353
6354 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6355
6356Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6357characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6358argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6359already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6360characters for their work until they want to change.
6361
6362*** Input methods
6363
6364An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6365specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6366has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6367the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6368support several input methods.
6369
6370The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6371another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6372work.
6373
6374A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6375characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6376composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6377consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6378sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6379letter.
6380
6381The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6382by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6383First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6384marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6385mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6386
6387None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6388they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6389phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6390converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6391
6392Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6393word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6394typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6395the first guess is wrong.
6396
6397*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6398turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6399
6400If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6401byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6402they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6403the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6404
6405However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6406use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6407includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6408translate automatically to and from either one.
6409
6410*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6411
6412Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6413file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6414sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6415what you want.
6416
6417If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6418example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6419system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6420multibyte characters in that buffer.
6421
6422If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6423character conversion as well.
6424
6425*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6426
6427A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6428Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6429requires using many fonts.
6430
6431Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6432collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6433
6434A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6435the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6436have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6437you would use a font.
6438
6439If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6440specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6441display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6442
6443The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6444(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6445characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6446or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6447and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6448
6449*** Defining fontsets.
6450
6451Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6452chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6453with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6454
6455Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6456of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6457`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6458standard fontset are created automatically.
6459
6460If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6461argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6462FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6463with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6464name is `fontset-startup'.
6465
6466Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6467The resource value should have this form:
6468 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6469FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6470 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6471 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6472 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6473The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6474of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6475CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6476FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6477
6478Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6479last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6480You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6481
6482For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6483font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6484following resource,
6485 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6486the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6487 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6488Here is the substitution rule:
6489 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6490 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6491 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6492 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6493 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6494
6495The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6496fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6497that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6498
6499With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6500like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6501name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6502fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6503fontsets.
6504
6505*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6506defaults for a particular choice of language.
6507
6508Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6509method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6510visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6511already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6512language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6513system for new files that you create.
6514
6515It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6516set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6517whole Emacs session.
6518
6519For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6520chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6521with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6522
6523*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6524specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6525specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6526the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6527coding systems that Emacs supports.
6528
6529*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6530lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6531This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6532After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6533is used for *the immediately following command*.
6534
6535So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6536write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6537
6538If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6539then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6540
6541For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6542visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6543
6544*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6545construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6546to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6547specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6548of the file.
6549
6550*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6551the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6552code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6553translated into that character code.
6554
6555This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6556various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6557
6558By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6559
6560*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6561the coding system for keyboard input.
6562
6563Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6564with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6565some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6566
6567By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6568
6569Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6570input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6571translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6572to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6573designed to work with terminals.
6574
6575*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6576specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6577This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6578has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6579translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6580in the corresponding buffer.
6581
6582By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6583
6584*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6585to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6586It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6587
6588*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6589an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6590command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6591want to use.
6592
6593C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6594method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6595
6596*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6597layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6598remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6599which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6600
6601*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6602the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6603related information.
6604
6605*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6606HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6607scripts.
6608
6609*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6610information about the support for a particular language.
6611You specify the language as an argument.
6612
6613*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6614the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6615first dash.
6616
6617A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6618(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6619whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
66201 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6621
6622 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6623 B big5 (Chinese)
6624 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6625 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6626 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6627 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6628 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6629 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6630 K euc-korea (Korean)
6631 R koi8 (Russian)
6632 Q tibetan
6633 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6634 T lao
6635 T tis620 (Thai)
6636 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6637 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6638 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6639 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6640 z hz (Chinese)
6641
6642When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6643two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6644coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6645keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6646
6647*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6648conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6649
6650When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6651into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6652rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6653Rmail files themselves.
6654
6655*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6656conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6657
6658Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6659for sending mail:
6660
6661- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6662- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6663- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6664 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6665- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6666
6667*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6668to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6669Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6670translations.
6671
6672** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6673of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6674insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6675without any conversion.
6676
6677** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6678You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6679RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6680any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6681
6682** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6683functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6684
6685Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6686Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6687
6688Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6689mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6690
6691** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6692complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6693in the buffer before point.
6694
6695With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6696symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6697you are using.
6698
6699With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6700just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6701
6702** File locking works with NFS now.
6703
6704The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6705in the same directory as FILENAME.
6706
6707This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6708works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6709can become a bottleneck.
6710
6711The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6712does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6713create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6714file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6715rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6716so useful that the change is worth while.
6717
6718When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6719are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6720collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6721tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6722
6723** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6724it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6725show-paren-mode.
6726
6727** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6728selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6729delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6730
6731** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6732within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6733complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6734
6735** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6736it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6737set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6738
6739** Changes in View mode.
6740
6741*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6742Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6743
6744*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6745view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6746
6747*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6748previous state.
6749
6750*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6751scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6752
6753*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6754non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6755not just the selected window.
6756
6757*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6758read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6759turns View mode on or off.
6760
6761*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6762how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6763delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6764
6765** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6766now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6767
6768** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6769has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6770presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6771which version to compare with.
6772
6773** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6774blocks if a match is inside the block.
6775
6776The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6777is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6778isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6779shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6780
6781By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6782of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6783blocks, all of them or none.
6784
6785** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6786current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6787confirmation first.
6788
6789** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6790now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6791However, the mode will not be changed if
6792(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6793(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6794 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6795(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6796
6797This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6798
6799However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6800these commands do not change the major mode.
6801
6802** M-x occur changes.
6803
6804*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6805it performs a case-sensitive search.
6806
6807*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6808if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6809using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6810
6811** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6812in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6813window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6814that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6815buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6816
6817** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6818after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6819appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6820come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6821
6822** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6823selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6824buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6825
6826** Outline mode changes.
6827
6828*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6829
6830*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6831
6832** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6833you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6834Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6835was already active.
6836
6837The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6838unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6839get confused by it.
6840
6841If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6842set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6843
6844** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6845
6846*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6847conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6848character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6849including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6850
6851The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6852mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6853copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6854
6855*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6856are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6857values.
6858
6859`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6860case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6861`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6862case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6863
6864** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6865certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6866can be. The default value is 30.
6867
6868** Changes in Mail mode.
6869
6870*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6871Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6872composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6873`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6874`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6875behavior.
6876
6877C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6878compose-mail-other-frame.
6879
6880*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6881the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6882replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6883buffer that shows the original message.
6884
6885*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6886with separator lines around the contents.
6887
6888*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6889in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6890definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6891need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6892
6893*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6894
6895**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6896for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6897controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6898Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6899
6900**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6901to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6902/etc/passwd.
6903
6904**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6905to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6906/etc/passwd.
6907
6908** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6909special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6910directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6911reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6912
6913Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6914when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6915be taken to be magic.
6916
6917** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6918files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6919available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6920
6921M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6922(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6923
6924** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6925suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6926
6927In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6928
6929new key dired.el binding old key
6930------- ---------------- -------
6931 * c dired-change-marks c
6932 * m dired-mark m
6933 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6934 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6935 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6936 * u dired-unmark u
6937 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6938 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6939 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6940 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6941 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6942 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6943
6944** Rmail changes.
6945
6946*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6947saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6948chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6949each time you run it.
6950
6951*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6952whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6953
6954*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6955messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6956means to move in the opposite direction.
6957
6958*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6959you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6960
6961*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6962just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6963It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6964can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6965for output.
6966
6967** Gnus changes.
6968
6969*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6970
6971*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6972Gnus.
6973
6974*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6975`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6976
6977*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6978article mode line.
6979
6980*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6981
6982*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6983
6984(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6985
6986*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6987are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6988`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6989
6990*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6991
6992*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6993
6994*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6995See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6996
6997*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6998Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6999used to pick articles.
7000
7001*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7002another have been added.
7003
7004 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7005
7006*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7007generating lines in buffers.
7008
7009*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7010`M-C-_'.
7011
7012*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7013
7014*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7015
7016 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7017
7018*** Scores can be decayed.
7019
7020 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7021
7022*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7023Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7024
7025*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7026the native server.
7027
7028 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7029
7030*** A new command for reading collections of documents
7031(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
7032
7033*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7034
7035*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7036even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7037
7038*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7039(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7040
7041 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7042 a group.
7043
7044*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7045sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7046
7047 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7048
7049*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7050
7051 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7052
7053*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7054
7055 Use the `Y c' command.
7056
7057*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7058
7059*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7060
7061 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7062
7063*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7064from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7065
7066 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7067
7068*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7069
7070*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7071the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7072
7073 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7074
7075Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7076and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7077from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7078hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7079this issue.)
7080
7081Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7082automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7083particular news group. This can be done by:
7084
7085 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7086
7087Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7088of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7089"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7090system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7091for reading and posting).
7092
7093CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7094 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7095Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7096newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7097there.
7098
7099Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7100default. Here are some of these default settings:
7101
7102 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7103 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7104 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7105 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7106 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7107
7108When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7109the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7110
7111** CC mode changes.
7112
7113*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7114code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7115values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7116this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7117Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7118loaded.
7119
7120If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7121Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7122style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7123share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7124c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7125must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7126
7127*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7128of the current buffer.
7129
7130*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7131it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7132of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7133
7134*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7135style that the Python developers like.
7136
7137*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7138This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7139just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7140
7141** VC Changes [new]
7142
7143** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7144name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7145directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7146
7147This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7148master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7149developers.
7150
7151You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7152RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7153
7154*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7155other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7156writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7157calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7158
7159*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7160version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7161
7162** Calendar changes.
7163
7164A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7165of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7166for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7167
7168** ps-print changes
7169
7170There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7171
7172*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7173
7174The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7175formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7176`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7177`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7178It defaults to `letter'.
7179If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7180
7181The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7182of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7183non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7184
7185The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7186It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7187It defaults to 1.
7188
7189*** Horizontal layout
7190
7191The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7192`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7193All are measured in points.
7194
7195*** Vertical layout
7196
7197The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7198`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7199All are measured in points.
7200
7201*** Headers
7202
7203If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7204`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7205margin above the text.
7206
7207If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7208framing box is printed around the header.
7209
7210The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7211`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7212
7213The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7214`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7215`ps-header-font-size'.
7216
7217*** Font managing
7218
7219The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7220used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7221`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7222elements to this alist.
7223
7224The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7225for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7226
7227** hideshow changes.
7228
7229*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7230C++, ; for lisp).
7231
7232*** Support for java-mode added.
7233
7234*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7235in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7236
7237*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7238the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7239way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7240
7241*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7242robust and a lot faster.
7243
7244*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7245
7246*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7247to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7248documentation for more details.
7249
7250** Changes in Enriched mode.
7251
7252*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7253filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7254of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7255use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7256the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7257
7258*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7259distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7260as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7261as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7262
7263** Font Lock mode
7264
7265*** Custom support
7266
7267The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7268font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7269faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7270group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7271your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7272consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7273
7274You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7275
7276*** Maximum decoration
7277
7278Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7279default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7280of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7281supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7282to get the old behavior.
7283
7284*** New support
7285
7286Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7287
7288Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7289support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7290
7291*** Configurable support
7292
7293Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7294additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7295c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7296java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7297list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7298of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7299convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7300
7301Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7302way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7303it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7304
7305*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7306
7307You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7308highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7309for any mode.
7310
7311For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7312
7313 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7314
7315in your ~/.emacs.
7316
7317*** New faces
7318
7319Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7320font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7321distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7322to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7323
7324*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7325
7326The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7327cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7328same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7329
7330*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7331
7332The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7333according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7334the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7335non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7336refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7337the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7338Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7339
7340This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7341For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7342this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7343refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7344containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7345the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7346
7347As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7348
7349Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7350Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7351Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7352new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7353
7354If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7355settings.
7356
7357** Ada mode changes.
7358
7359*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7360If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7361procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7362you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7363stubs.
7364
7365*** There are two new commands:
7366 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7367 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7368
7369The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7370`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7371`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7372
7373*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7374is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7375Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7376
7377*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7378formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7379places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7380space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7381
7382** Scheme mode changes.
7383
7384*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7385mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7386for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7387with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7388have any effect.
7389
7390If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7391still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7392scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7393variables as buffer-local variables.
7394
7395*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7396Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7397
7398** Changes to the emacsclient program
7399
7400*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7401USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7402associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7403can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7404
7405*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7406it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7407buffer in Emacs.
7408
7409*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7410use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7411ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7412option takes precedence.
7413
7414** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7415constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7416(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7417
7418** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7419which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7420the current defun.
7421
7422** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7423following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7424
7425** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7426and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7427necessary).
7428
7429** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7430if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7431these register values no longer become completely useless.
7432If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7433asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7434it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7435
7436** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7437example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7438be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7439you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7440
7441You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7442variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7443file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7444revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7445only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7446
7447** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7448since it applies only to the current frame.
7449
7450** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7451file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7452and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7453
7454This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7455multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7456variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7457tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7458instead of just the file you are editing.
7459
7460** RefTeX mode
7461
7462RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7463and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7464different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7465multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7466turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7467
7468C-c ( reftex-label
7469 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7470 knows which kind of label is needed.
7471
7472C-c ) reftex-reference
7473 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7474 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7475
7476C-c [ reftex-citation
7477 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7478 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7479
7480C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7481 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7482
7483C-c = reftex-toc
7484 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7485 can quickly jump to every section.
7486
7487Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7488commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7489Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7490reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7491C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7492
7493** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7494
7495*** Info documentation is now available.
7496
7497*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7498both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7499
7500*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7501bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7502
7503*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7504(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7505
7506*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7507entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7508appropriate functions.
7509
7510*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7511entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7512
7513*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7514been cleaned.
7515
7516*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7517bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7518
7519*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7520shall be delimited.
7521
7522*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7523bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7524bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7525
7526*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7527field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7528prefixed with `ALT'.
7529
7530*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7531bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7532formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7533documentation).
7534
7535*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7536documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7537for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7538
7539*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7540comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7541
7542*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7543alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7544signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7545
7546*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7547
7548*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7549
7550*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7551from alien sources.
7552
7553*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7554to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7555crossref entries.
7556
7557*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7558region.
7559
7560*** Added support for imenu.
7561
7562*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7563of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7564`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7565`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7566
7567*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7568from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7569
7570** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7571
7572** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7573
7574** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7575functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7576Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7577as an argument.
7578
7579When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7580and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7581
7582** browse-url changes
7583
7584*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7585Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7586(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7587non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7588customization variables.
7589
7590*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7591
7592*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7593lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7594(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7595
7596** Changes in Ediff
7597
7598*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7599pops up the Info file for this command.
7600
7601*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7602the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7603merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7604directories).
7605
7606*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7607and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7608files in the same directory.
7609
7610*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7611The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7612related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7613
7614** Changes in Viper
7615
7616*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7617*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7618 instead of vip-.
7619*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7620*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7621Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7622*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7623*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7624*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7625color when Viper is in insert state.
7626*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7627Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7628viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7629
7630** Etags changes.
7631
7632*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7633default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7634Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7635variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7636not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7637
7638*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7639
7640*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7641constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7642
7643*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7644recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7645In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7646
7647*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7648C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7649recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7650methods and protocols.
7651
7652*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7653.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7654column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7655paragraph name.
7656
7657*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7658an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7659at least M times and as many as N times.
7660
7661** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7662in files has changed slightly.
7663
7664With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7665time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7666This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7667with old time-stamp-format values.
7668
7669In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7670(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7671This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7672reasons.
7673
7674In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7675natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7676fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7677(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7678time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7679specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7680
7681Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7682case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7683truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7684
7685The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7686being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7687future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7688recommended now will continue to work then.
7689
7690See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7691details.
7692
7693** There are some additional major modes:
7694
7695dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7696m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7697meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7698
7699** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7700copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7701into Emacs.
7702
7703** New Lisp packages include:
7704
7705*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7706
7707*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7708be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7709
7710*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7711
7712*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7713in shell buffers.
7714
7715*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7716See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7717and `elint-defun'.
7718
7719*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7720meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7721ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7722strings or comments.
7723
7724These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7725abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7726you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7727insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7728at these points.
7729
7730*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7731can visit them by short forms of their names.
7732
7733*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7734Emacs Lisp function at point.
7735
7736*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7737
7738*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7739switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7740
7741*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7742
7743*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7744
7745*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7746
7747*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7748from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7749
7750*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7751You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7752inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7753original place after inserting the copy.
7754
7755*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7756on the buffer.
7757
7758You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7759velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7760(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7761
7762Enable mouse-drag with:
7763 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7764-or-
7765 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7766
7767*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7768mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7769
7770*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7771It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7772
7773*** ogonek
7774
7775The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7776Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7777platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7778TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7779ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7780prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7781instance) and vice versa.
7782
7783To use this package load it using
7784 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7785Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7786 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7787 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7788The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7789ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7790
7791*** Interface to ph.
7792
7793Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7794
7795The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7796services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7797these servers.
7798
7799*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7800
7801*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7802You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7803while the real cursor does not move.
7804
7805*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7806for visiting your favorite web sites.
7807
7808*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7809so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7810
7811** movemail change
7812
7813Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7814mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7815supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7816user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7817
7818This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
0cb146bf 7819
3787e12e
GM
7820* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7821
7822** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7823
7824Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7825end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7826Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7827file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7828file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7829
7830To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7831C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7832coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7833specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7834LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7835save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
0cb146bf 7836
3787e12e
GM
7837* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7838
7839** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7840Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7841vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7842Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7843
7844** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7845to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7846
7847In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7848don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7849"win".
7850
7851** Basic Lisp changes
7852
7853*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7854evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7855
7856*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7857be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7858or by the user.
7859
7860The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7861
7862*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7863
7864(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7865(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7866
7867*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7868usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7869its argument.
7870
7871*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7872
7873*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7874
7875*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7876
7877*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7878error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7879include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7880`format' function.
7881
7882*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7883or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7884whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7885
7886*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7887either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7888adding one of these suffixes.
7889
7890*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7891which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7892If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7893
7894We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7895because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7896
7897*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7898
7899*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7900You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7901
7902*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7903conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7904
7905 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7906
7907BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7908BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7909
7910*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7911choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7912restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7913works using `save-current-buffer'.
7914
7915*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7916write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7917of the last form.
7918
7919*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7920which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7921last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7922as the last form.
7923
7924*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7925characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7926matches.
7927
7928For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7929
7930*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7931with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7932Then it returns that string.
7933
7934For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7935
7936(with-output-to-string
7937 (princ "The buffer is ")
7938 (princ (buffer-name)))
7939
7940returns "The buffer is foo".
7941
7942** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7943is non-nil.
7944
7945These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7946buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7947characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7948
7949*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7950a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7951
7952Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7953character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7954Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7955position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7956characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7957 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7958
7959ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7960Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7961non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7962characters".
7963
7964The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7965through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7966"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7967range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7968leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7969
7970*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7971(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7972multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7973character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7974
7975This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7976always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7977
7978However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7979
7980*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7981because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7982have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7983the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7984guaranteed.
7985
7986*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7987between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7988character).
7989
7990When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7991
7992 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7993 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7994 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7995 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7996 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7997
7998*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7999
8000*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
8001`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8002more than the number of characters.
8003
8004You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8005it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8006\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8007is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8008follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8009newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8010
8011*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8012and returns a string containing those characters.
8013
8014*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8015(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8016counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8017character, sref signals an error.
8018
8019*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8020in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8021string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8022
8023*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8024in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8025region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8026
8027*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8028the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8029to a vector of the characters in it.
8030
8031*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8032of a string. You call it as follows:
8033
8034 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8035
8036This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8037STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8038This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8039Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8040it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8041
8042*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8043if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8044
8045*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8046if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8047
8048*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8049to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8050not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8051which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8052
8053(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8054
8055This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8056
8057The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8058If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8059are not included in the resulting value.
8060
8061The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8062at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8063WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8064is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8065
8066If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8067place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8068character extends across that column), then the padding character
8069PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8070string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8071column START-COLUMN.
8072
8073*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8074the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8075necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8076difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8077changed text, before the change.
8078
8079*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8080sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8081one character set for each script, not for each language.
8082
8083**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8084
8085**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8086
8087**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8088set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8089
8090**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8091name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8092which identify the character within that character set.
8093
8094**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8095byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8096opposite of split-char.
8097
8098**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8099of all the characters between BEG and END.
8100
8101**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8102of all the characters in a string.
8103
8104*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8105and specifying coding systems.
8106
8107**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8108system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8109of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8110(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8111and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8112as what to do about code conversion.)
8113
8114**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8115name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8116
8117**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8118for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8119except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8120
8121Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8122which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8123to match against a file name.
8124
8125VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8126a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8127decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8128to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8129systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8130specifies the coding system for encoding.
8131
8132If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8133or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8134
8135**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8136the coding system to use for network sockets.
8137
8138Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8139which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8140either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8141service names.
8142
8143VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8144a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8145decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8146to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8147systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8148specifies the coding system for encoding.
8149
8150If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8151or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8152
8153**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8154for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8155except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8156start the subprocess.
8157
8158**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8159systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8160when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8161(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8162to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8163
8164**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8165coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8166subprocess.
8167
8168It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8169but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8170start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8171connection permanently or until overridden.
8172
8173The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8174file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8175network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8176coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8177It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8178system for one operation at a time.
8179
8180**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8181files, subprocesses or network connections.
8182
8183**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8184coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8185The value is a cons cell,
8186 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8187where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8188the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8189input to the subprocess.
8190
8191**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8192change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8193
8194** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8195customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8196you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8197
8198You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8199variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8200information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8201legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8202customization.
8203
8204Thus, instead of writing
8205
8206 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8207 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8208
8209you would now write this:
8210
8211 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8212 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8213 :type 'boolean
8214 :group foo)
8215
8216The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8217two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8218describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8219for a description of them.
8220
8221The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8222should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8223
8224 (defgroup ispell nil
8225 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8226 :group 'processes)
8227
8228The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8229group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8230but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8231to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8232second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8233
8234Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8235package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8236have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8237package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8238first-level subgroups.
8239
8240** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8241
8242This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8243separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8244
8245** easy-mmode
8246
8247The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8248developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8249only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8250predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8251`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8252`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8253
8254** Text property changes
8255
8256*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8257text property.
8258
8259*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8260previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8261place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8262functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8263starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8264
8265If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8266LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8267of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8268position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8269
8270*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8271value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8272is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8273
8274** Changes in invisibility features
8275
8276*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8277hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8278is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8279should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8280would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8281make the overlay visible.
8282
8283During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8284invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8285needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8286which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8287the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8288t when it should hide it.
8289
8290*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8291
8292Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8293invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8294and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8295Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8296manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8297Here is an example of how to do this:
8298
8299 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8300 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8301 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8302 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8303
8304 ...
8305 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8306
8307 ...
8308 ;; When done with the overlays:
8309 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8310 ;; Or respectively:
8311 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8312
8313** Changes in syntax parsing.
8314
8315*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8316`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8317obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8318`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8319
8320If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8321is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8322used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8323
8324When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8325character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8326
8327 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8328 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8329
8330 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8331 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8332 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8333
8334 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8335 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8336 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8337 determine the syntax type of the character.
8338
8339 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8340 of the current buffer.
8341
8342*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8343value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8344for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8345
8346*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8347and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8348only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8349character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8350another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8351
8352These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8353text property.
8354
8355*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8356arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8357of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8358
8359*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8360(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8361element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8362nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8363string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8364
8365*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8366syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8367`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8368
8369** Changes in face features
8370
8371*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8372if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8373
8374*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8375of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8376
8377*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8378set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8379
8380*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8381set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8382
8383*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8384by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8385and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8386the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8387overlay property).
8388
8389This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8390arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8391
8392** Changes in file-handling functions
8393
8394*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8395directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8396they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8397is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8398
8399This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8400begins with ~.
8401
8402*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8403it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8404
8405*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8406the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8407
8408*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8409as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8410
8411*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8412character code conversion as well as other things.
8413
8414Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8415(formerly it did not).
8416
8417*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8418environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8419
8420*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8421instead of constant strings.
8422
8423*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8424to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8425any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8426
8427substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8428in the same way as before.
8429
8430*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8431The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8432which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8433
8434*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8435error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8436else, and returns nil.
8437
8438*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8439directory cannot be listed.
8440
8441** Changes in minibuffer input
8442
8443*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8444read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8445additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8446argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8447ways:
8448
8449 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8450 It is available through the history command M-n.
8451
8452*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8453read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8454argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8455minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8456enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8457
8458In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8459argument in this way.
8460
8461*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8462from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8463minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8464
8465** Echo area features
8466
8467*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8468echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8469minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8470after the echo area is cleared.
8471
8472*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8473in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8474
8475** Keyboard input features
8476
8477*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8478set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8479
8480*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8481received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8482by keyboard macros.
8483
8484** Frame-related changes
8485
8486*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8487creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8488hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8489
8490*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8491the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8492has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8493
8494*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8495selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8496value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8497in the selected frame.
8498
8499*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8500is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8501which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8502
8503** X Windows features
8504
8505*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8506x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8507x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8508
8509*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8510The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8511
8512*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8513MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8514A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8515
8516If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8517it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8518
8519** Subprocess features
8520
8521*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8522functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8523automatically.
8524
8525*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8526and returns the output from the command as a string.
8527
8528*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8529and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8530
8531** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8532does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8533
8534** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8535at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8536goes after the other menu items.
8537
8538** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8539of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8540around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8541are in use.
8542
8543The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8544series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8545
8546Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8547after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8548form.
8549
8550** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8551is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8552but its hook is still run.
8553
8554** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8555for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8556
8557If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8558regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8559useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8560
8561This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8562are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8563filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8564warned.
8565
8566** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8567way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8568
8569** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8570integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8571functions like display-time.
8572
8573** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8574name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8575
8576** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8577can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8578is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8579
8580** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8581if there is an error in compilation.
8582
8583** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8584switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8585argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8586they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8587
8588** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8589Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8590the *scratch* buffer.
8591
8592** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8593The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8594where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8595e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8596
8597** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8598and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8599It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8600
8601** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8602using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8603variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8604and compose-mail-other-frame.
8605
8606** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8607can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8608full name of the specified user will be returned.
8609
8610** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8611of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8612where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8613in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8614option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8615files at all.
8616
8617** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8618and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8619width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8620the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8621
8622For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8623minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8624with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8625is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8626
8627** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8628
8629** imenu.el changes.
8630
8631You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8632item from menu created by imenu.
8633
8634An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8635#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8636select one of those items.
0cb146bf 8637
3787e12e 8638* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
0cb146bf 8639
3787e12e
GM
8640* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8641
8642** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8643mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8644
8645** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8646use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8647Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
0cb146bf 8648
3787e12e
GM
8649* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8650
8651** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8652To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8653
8654** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8655conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8656matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8657expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8658word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8659all caps.
8660
8661** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8662at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8663
8664When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8665does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8666as in previous Emacs versions.
8667
8668** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8669non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8670time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8671frames.
8672
8673** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8674if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8675This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8676Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8677accident.
8678
8679** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8680keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8681It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8682line and then executing the macro.
8683
8684This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8685
8686** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8687(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8688characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8689characters.
8690
8691** Font Lock mode
8692
8693*** Font Lock support modes
8694
8695Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8696below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8697hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8698to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8699Font Lock mode is enabled.
8700
8701For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8702
8703 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8704
8705in your ~/.emacs.
8706
8707*** lazy-lock
8708
8709The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8710only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8711becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8712Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8713occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8714buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8715Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8716
8717To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8718
8719 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8720
8721To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8722
8723** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8724
8725*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8726paren and key.
8727
8728*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8729supported.
8730
8731** Gnus changes.
8732
8733Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8734commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8735significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8736previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8737
8738Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8739between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8740
8741*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8742variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8743obsolete.
8744
8745*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8746missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8747
8748 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8749
8750*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8751
8752 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8753
8754*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8755referred.
8756
8757*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8758
8759 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8760
8761*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8762
8763 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8764
8765*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8766buffers.
8767
8768 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8769
8770*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8771
8772 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8773
8774*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8775
8776 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8777
8778*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8779
8780 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8781
8782*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8783is possible.
8784
8785 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8786
8787*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8788groups of groups.
8789
8790*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8791
8792*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8793batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8794
8795*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8796
8797*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8798
8799*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8800
8801 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8802
8803*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8804expiration times.
8805
8806*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8807
8808*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8809process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8810
8811*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8812articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8813bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8814
8815*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8816articles with the `*' command.
8817
8818*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8819
8820*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8821
8822 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8823
8824*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8825
8826*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8827`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8828
8829*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8830buffer.
8831
8832*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8833
8834*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8835
8836*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8837
8838 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8839
8840*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8841
8842 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8843
8844*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8845
8846*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8847
8848*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8849
8850 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8851 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8852
8853*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8854refetching.
8855
8856 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8857
8858*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8859buffer to allow easier treatment.
8860
8861*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8862
8863*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8864
8865 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8866
8867*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8868articles.
8869
8870 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8871
8872*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8873
8874*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8875cited text to hide is now customizable.
8876
8877 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8878
8879*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8880
8881 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8882
8883*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8884
8885*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8886
8887The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8888in greater detail.
0cb146bf 8889
3787e12e
GM
8890* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8891
8892** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8893second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8894asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8895exists.
8896
8897** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8898as well as lists.
8899
8900** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8901of a given keymap.
8902
8903** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8904given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8905keymap or nil.
8906
8907** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8908an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8909name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8910menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8911equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8912alias.
0cb146bf 8913
3787e12e
GM
8914* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8915
8916** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8917
8918Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8919This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8920was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8921far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8922pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8923
8924For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8925you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8926`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8927
8928** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8929
8930The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8931do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8932It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8933much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8934chapter of the manual for details.
8935
8936However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8937customization variables take effect.
8938
8939** Marking with the mouse.
8940
8941When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8942highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8943using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8944
8945** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8946
8947*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8948
8949*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8950to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8951
8952*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8953in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8954you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8955application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8956applications, these problems are significant.
8957
8958If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8959likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8960However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8961will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8962other DOS application as a subprocess.
8963
8964Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8965You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8966
8967If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8968subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8969have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8970Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8971separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8972Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8973
8974** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8975
8976This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8977which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8978minibuffer contains.
8979
8980** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8981
8982The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8983It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8984It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8985affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8986
8987The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8988it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8989and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8990when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8991
8992** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8993enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8994
8995** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8996F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8997Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8998
8999If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
9000menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
9001something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
9002the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
9003
9004 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
9005
9006** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
9007to replace the characters it "deletes".
9008
9009** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
9010
9011** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
9012a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
9013select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
9014It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
9015immediately after the selected one.
9016
9017This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
9018made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
9019
9020** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
9021
9022Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
9023directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
9024If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
9025Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
9026recover-session.
9027
9028You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
9029auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
9030will not work.
9031
9032Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
9033normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
9034this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
9035bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
9036now that the bug is fixed.
9037
9038** Changes to Version Control (VC)
9039
9040There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
9041when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
9042Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
9043which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
9044
9045If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
9046telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
9047VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
9048the link is visited and a warning displayed.
9049
9050** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
9051Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
9052is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
9053
9054There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
9055Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
9056enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
9057The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
9058remain normal.
9059
9060** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
9061header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
9062
9063Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
9064known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
9065offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
9066Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
9067
9068Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
9069of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
9070a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
9071name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
9072documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
9073`mail-directory-stream'.)
9074
9075** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
9076skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
9077characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
9078with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
9079
9080Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
9081- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
9082wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
9083
9084The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
9085less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
9086headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
9087Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
9088Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
9089fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
9090to a limitation in font-lock).
9091
9092External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
9093
9094** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
9095buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9096buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9097this example:
9098
9099 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9100 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9101
9102** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9103
9104*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9105
9106*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9107
9108*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9109
9110*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9111entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9112will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9113isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9114(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9115The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9116
9117*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9118does the same job.
9119
9120*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9121"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9122
9123*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9124text.
9125
9126** Font Lock mode
9127
9128*** Global Font Lock mode
9129
9130Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9131new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9132font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9133turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9134on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9135
9136For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9137
9138 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9139
9140in your ~/.emacs.
9141
9142*** Local Refontification
9143
9144In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9145However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9146those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9147command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9148
9149In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9150(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9151current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9152above and below point.
9153
9154With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9155
9156** Follow mode
9157
9158Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9159buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9160side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9161they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9162split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9163follow-mode.
9164
9165M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9166
9167To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9168command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9169
9170** hide-show changes.
9171
9172The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9173to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9174normal hooks.
9175
9176** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9177The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9178
9179** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9180recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9181those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9182
9183** MSDOS Changes
9184
9185*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9186Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9187
9188*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9189and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9190
9191*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9192
9193*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9194pressing both mouse buttons.
9195
9196*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9197restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9198are:
9199
9200**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9201now works.
9202
9203**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9204
9205**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9206implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9207
9208**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9209
9210**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9211
9212**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9213
9214**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9215
9216**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
0cb146bf 9217
3787e12e
GM
9218* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9219
9220** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9221tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9222remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9223this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9224behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9225
9226** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9227
9228The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9229not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9230need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9231be different.
9232
9233It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9234than `system-type'.
9235
9236See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9237
9238** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9239now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9240
9241** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9242that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9243
9244** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9245no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9246reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9247
9248The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9249to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9250like this:
9251
9252 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9253
9254SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9255It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9256becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9257
9258REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9259seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9260means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9261
9262*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9263up if too much time passes.
9264
9265 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9266
9267This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9268If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9269of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9270form in BODY.
9271
9272*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9273a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9274call looks like this:
9275
9276 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9277
9278SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9279runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9280timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9281ARGS.
9282
9283Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9284command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9285command.
9286
9287REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9288time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9289does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9290each time Emacs becomes idle.
9291
9292If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9293idle for SECS seconds.
9294
9295*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9296all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9297programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9298instead.
9299
9300*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9301there is no answer within a certain time.
9302
9303 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9304
9305asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9306within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9307Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9308
9309** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9310arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9311meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9312arguments in between are ignored.
9313
9314This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9315the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9316
9317** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9318/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9319/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9320site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9321version.
9322
9323It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9324version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9325for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9326has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9327and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9328problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9329
9330** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9331.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9332systems with limited file name syntax.
9333
9334Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9335convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9336for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9337completions.el:
9338
9339(defvar save-completions-file-name
9340 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9341 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9342
9343This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9344depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9345convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9346Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9347MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9348
9349** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9350rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9351minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9352
9353** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9354marker from its buffer position.
9355
9356** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9357Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9358The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9359
9360** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9361that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9362condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9363of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9364matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9365regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9366
9367This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9368errors that happen often during editing.
9369
9370** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9371into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9372puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9373
9374** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9375now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9376
9377** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9378a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9379name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9380to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9381and not get-buffer-window.
9382
9383** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9384calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9385being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9386
9387If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9388buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9389property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9390non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9391are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9392property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9393over and over for the same text.
9394
9395** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9396
9397*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9398in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9399
9400;; @(#) HEADER: text
9401;; $HEADER: text $
9402
9403in addition to the normal
9404
9405;; HEADER: text
9406
9407*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9408checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9409lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9410
9411
0cb146bf 9412
3787e12e 9413* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9414
9415----------------------------------------------------------------------
9416Copyright information:
9417
75d80cc6 9418Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9419
9420 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9421 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9422 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9423 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9424
9425 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9426 of this document, or of portions of it,
9427 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9428 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
0cb146bf 9429
a933dad1
DL
9430Local variables:
9431mode: outline
9432paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9433end: